Xerox Document Centre
440/432/430/426/425/420
User Guide
604P00074
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Conventions ........................................................................................................1- 3
Orientation .......................................................................................................1- 3
Bracket text typeface .......................................................................................1- 4
Italic typeface................................................................................................... 1-4
Quick Pathway................................................................................................. 1-4
Notes................................................................................................................ 1-5
Hints................................................................................................................. 1-5
Cautions........................................................................................................... 1-5
Warnings..........................................................................................................1- 5
Related Information Sources .............................................................................1- 6
Safety Notes ........................................................................................................1- 7
Safety Standards ............................................................................................. 1-9
Regulatory Information..................................................................................... 1-10
FCC Part 15................................................................................................... 1-10
ICES-003 ....................................................................................................... 1-10
FCC Part 68................................................................................................... 1-11
Canadian CSO3............................................................................................. 1-13
Laser Safety................................................................................................... 1-14
Environmental Compliance.............................................................................. 1-16
Energy Star® ................................................................................................. 1-16
Environmental ChoiceM................................................................................. 1-16
Illegal Copying................................................................................................... 1-17
Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)......................................................................... 1-20
2 Product Overview ......................................................................2-1
Identifying the machine components................................................................ 2-2
Optional Components.........................................................................................2- 4
Power ON/OFF.....................................................................................................2- 7
Powering On .................................................................................................... 2-7
Powering Off........................................................................................................ 2-9
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page i
Power Save Modes............................................................................................ 2-10
Changing the Default Time Settings .............................................................. 2-12
Modes.................................................................................................................2- 16
Features button.............................................................................................. 2-17
Job Status button ...........................................................................................2- 18
Machine Status button ...................................................................................2- 19
System controls ................................................................................................ 2-24
Job Interrupt ...................................................................................................... 2-25
Auditron Access Screen................................................................................... 2-26
Information Sources .........................................................................................2- 27
3 Copy ........................................................................................... 3-1
Copying procedure .............................................................................................3- 2
1. Load the documents..................................................................................... 3-2
2. Select the Features button...........................................................................3- 6
3. Select the features ....................................................................................... 3-7
4. Enter the quantity.........................................................................................3- 8
5. Select Start .................................................................................................. 3-9
6. Identify the copy job in the Print Queue ....................................................... 3-9
Standard Features - Copy................................................................................. 3-10
Output ............................................................................................................ 3-10
Sides Imaged ................................................................................................. 3-14
Reduce/Enlarge ............................................................................................. 3-16
Paper Supply.................................................................................................. 3-18
Image Quality................................................................................................. 3-20
Added Features - Copy..................................................................................... 3-21
Image Adjustment tab - Copy........................................................................... 3-22
Bound Originals.............................................................................................. 3-25
Image Shift..................................................................................................... 3-27
Expert Image Quality...................................................................................... 3-28
Erase.............................................................................................................. 3-29
Edit (optional)................................................................................................. 3-30
Output Format - Copy ....................................................................................... 3-34
Transparencies .............................................................................................. 3-34
N Up (2 Up - DC426/420)............................................................................... 3-36
Annotation...................................................................................................... 3-38
Page ii
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Inserts ............................................................................................................ 3-42
Booklet Creation ............................................................................................ 3-44
Covers (DC440/432/430/425)........................................................................ 3-45
Job Assembly - Copy........................................................................................ 3-48
Build Job ........................................................................................................ 3-48
Stored Jobs.................................................................................................... 3-50
Managing Copy Jobs........................................................................................ 3-53
Print Queue.................................................................................................... 3-53
Completed Print Jobs Queue......................................................................... 3-56
4 Fax...............................................................................................4-1
Embedded Fax Procedure.................................................................................. 4-2
Standard Features - Embedded Fax.................................................................. 4-7
Resolution........................................................................................................ 4-7
Original Type.................................................................................................... 4-8
Sides Scanned................................................................................................. 4-9
Dialing............................................................................................................ 4-10
More Features - Embedded Fax....................................................................... 4-18
Cover Letter (Cover Page)............................................................................. 4-19
Transmission Report...................................................................................... 4-20
Lighter/Darker ................................................................................................ 4-20
Delayed Start ................................................................................................. 4-22
Send Priority (DC440/432/430/425)............................................................... 4-23
Advanced Features - Embedded Fax .............................................................. 4-24
Build Job ........................................................................................................ 4-25
Poll Remote Fax ............................................................................................ 4-26
Store for Polling ............................................................................................. 4-27
Fax Mailbox.................................................................................................... 4-30
Original Size (DC440/432/430/425)/Mixed Size Originals (DC426/420)........ 4-33
Reports & Setups - Embedded Fax ................................................................. 4-34
Fax Reports ................................................................................................... 4-35
Answer Mode................................................................................................. 4-36
Dial Directory Setup....................................................................................... 4-37
Comment Setup............................................................................................. 4-42
Transmit Header Print.................................................................................... 4-43
Server Fax Procedure 440/432/430/425........................................................... 4-44
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page iii
Sending a Fax using Server Fax.................................................................... 4-45
Standard Features - Server Fax ....................................................................... 4-48
Resolution ...................................................................................................... 4-48
Original Type.................................................................................................. 4-49
Sides Scanned............................................................................................... 4-50
Dialing ............................................................................................................ 4-51
More Fax Features - Server Fax....................................................................... 4-55
Lighter/Darker ................................................................................................ 4-55
Original Input Size.......................................................................................... 4-56
Delayed Start ................................................................................................. 4-57
Authentication Mode - Server Fax ................................................................... 4-58
Login - Guest Access..................................................................................... 4-58
Login - Network Authenticated Access .......................................................... 4-59
Changing the Authentication Service............................................................. 4-60
Logging Off..................................................................................................... 4-61
LAN Fax (Local Area Network Fax).................................................................. 4-62
LAN Fax Features.......................................................................................... 4-62
Managing Fax Jobs........................................................................................... 4-63
Fax Queue ..................................................................................................... 4-63
Completed Fax Jobs Queue .......................................................................... 4-65
Using Media Print................................................................................................ 5-2
Network Scanning............................................................................................... 6-2
Templates and template list ............................................................................. 6-4
Public and Private Templates .......................................................................... 6-5
Image Adjustment ............................................................................................... 6-7
Original Size..................................................................................................... 6-8
Basic Image Quality ......................................................................................... 6-9
Sides Imaged ................................................................................................. 6-10
Reduce/Enlarge ............................................................................................. 6-11
Stored Image Settings.................................................................................... 6-12
Page iv
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Erase.............................................................................................................. 6-13
Output Format (or Filing Setups)..................................................................... 6-14
Server IP Address /Server Name................................................................... 6-15
Document Path / Volume............................................................................... 6-16
Login Name/Password................................................................................... 6-17
If File Already Exists (or Filing Policy)............................................................ 6-17
Authentication Mode - Network Scanning...................................................... 6-22
Login - Guest Access..................................................................................... 6-22
Login - Network Authenticated Access .......................................................... 6-23
Changing the Authentication Service............................................................. 6-24
Logging Off .................................................................................................... 6-25
Managing Scan Jobs ........................................................................................ 6-26
Scan Queue................................................................................................... 6-26
7 E-mail ..........................................................................................7-1
Standard Features............................................................................................... 7-2
Entering a manual E-mail address................................................................... 7-3
Using the Address Books................................................................................. 7-4
Image Adjustment............................................................................................... 7-7
Original Size..................................................................................................... 7-8
Basic Image Quality......................................................................................... 7-9
Sides Imaged................................................................................................. 7-10
Stored Image Settings ................................................................................... 7-11
Erase.............................................................................................................. 7-12
Output Format ................................................................................................... 7-13
Reply to.......................................................................................................... 7-13
Authentication Mode - E-mail........................................................................... 7-14
Login - Guest Access..................................................................................... 7-14
Login - Network Authenticated Access .......................................................... 7-15
Login - Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access ............................ 7-16
Changing the Authentication Service............................................................. 7-17
Logging Off .................................................................................................... 7-18
Managing Scan Jobs ........................................................................................ 7-19
Scan Queue................................................................................................... 7-19
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page v
Completed Scan Jobs Queue ........................................................................ 7-20
8 Print............................................................................................ 8-1
Print Driver Features........................................................................................... 8-2
Tower Mailbox ..................................................................................................... 8-5
Managing Print Jobs........................................................................................... 8-6
Print Queue...................................................................................................... 8-6
Completed Print Jobs Queue........................................................................... 8-9
Standard Features - Internet Services............................................................... 9-2
Interface Options.............................................................................................. 9-2
Services Tab ........................................................................................................ 9-4
Job Submission................................................................................................ 9-4
Stored Templates............................................................................................. 9-5
Queue Tab............................................................................................................9- 6
Status Tab............................................................................................................ 9-7
Properties Tab ..................................................................................................... 9-8
Properties Features.......................................................................................... 9-9
Maintenance Tab ............................................................................................... 9-13
Assistance Tab.................................................................................................. 9-14
Scanning with Internet Services...................................................................... 9-15
Public and Private Repositories ..................................................................... 9-15
Template Pools .............................................................................................. 9-16
Template Management .................................................................................. 9-16
Scan to File .................................................................................................... 9-24
Scan to Fax ................................................................................................... 9-27
Scan with Local Copy..................................................................................... 9-27
Problem Solving................................................................................................ 9-28
10Paper and other media ............................................................. 10-1
Loading paper...................................................................................................... 10-2
Preparing paper for loading.............................................................................. 10-2
Loading the paper trays ................................................................................... 10-2
The Bypass Tray.............................................................................................. 10-6
The Envelope Tray (optional)........................................................................... 10-8
Page vi
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
The High Capacity Feeder (optional)............................................................. 10-10
Auto Tray Switching....................................................................................... 10-11
Storing and Handling Paper............................................................................. 10-12
Other media ....................................................................................................... 10-13
11Setups.........................................................................................11-1
Setup Procedures ............................................................................................... 11-2
Key Operator Tools.......................................................................................... 11-2
System Administrator Tools............................................................................. 11-3
Auditron Administrator Tools............................................................................ 11-3
Owner Tools..................................................................................................... 11-4
Changing the Settings...................................................................................... 11-4
Machine Setups................................................................................................... 11-6
Access the Machine Setups............................................................................. 11-7
Paper Tray Setups........................................................................................... 11-8
Date/Time Setup.............................................................................................. 11-9
Walkup Screen............................................................................................... 11-11
Timers............................................................................................................ 11-11
Contention...................................................................................................... 11-13
Localization.................................................................................................... 11-14
Additional Setups.............................................................................................. 11-15
Report Languages ......................................................................................... 11-15
Touch Screen Contrast.................................................................................. 11-16
Customer Support Number............................................................................ 11-16
Paper Sizes.................................................................................................... 11-17
Machine Serial Number ................................................................................. 11-17
Fault Override.................................................................................................... 11-19
Accessing Fault Override............................................................................... 11-19
Unavailable Features..................................................................................... 11-20
Copy Setups ...................................................................................................... 11-25
Access the Copy Setups................................................................................ 11-25
Reduce/Enlarge ............................................................................................. 11-26
Image Quality................................................................................................. 11-28
Output ............................................................................................................ 11-29
Sides Imaged................................................................................................. 11-29
Expert Image Quality ..................................................................................... 11-31
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page vii
Margin Shift (DC440/432/430/425) ................................................................ 11-31
Erase (DC440/432/430/425) .......................................................................... 11-32
Fax Setups ......................................................................................................... 11-34
Access the Fax Setups .................................................................................. 11-34
Server Fax Setups (DC440/432/430/425) ......................................................... 11-36
Embedded Fax................................................................................................... 11-37
Fax Terminal Setups......................................................................................11- 37
Access Fax Terminal Setups ......................................................................... 11-38
Fax Printing Options....................................................................................... 11-44
Fax Report Options........................................................................................ 11-47
Fax Panel Defaults......................................................................................... 11-50
Fax Mailboxes................................................................................................ 11-53
Fax File Management .................................................................................... 11-55
Fax Communication Setups........................................................................... 11-57
Outgoing Fax Options. ................................................................................... 11-58
Incoming Fax Options .................................................................................... 11-63
Auditron Setups ................................................................................................ 11-67
Access Auditron Setups................................................................................. 11-68
Internal Auditron (DC440/432/430/425) ......................................................... 11-69
Internal Auditron (DC426/420) ....................................................................... 11-76
Foreign Interface Device................................................................................ 11-84
Access Rights.................................................................................................... 11-86
Assign Privileges............................................................................................ 11-89
Add Pin........................................................................................................... 11-90
Set User Privileges......................................................................................... 11-90
Delete PIN...................................................................................................... 11-91
(DC440/432/430/425)..................................................................................... 11-92
Network Scanning Setups................................................................................ 11-94
Print Setups ....................................................................................................... 11-96
E-mail Setups (DC440/432/430/425).................................................................11- 99
12Maintenance .............................................................................. 12-1
Ordering Supplies ............................................................................................... 12-2
Cleaning the DC440/432/430/426/425/420.......................................................... 12-3
Page viii
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
The Control Panel and Touch Screen.............................................................. 12-4
Replacing the Copy/Print Cartridge .................................................................. 12-5
Removing the old Copy/Print Cartridge ........................................................... 12-5
Recycling the Copy/Print Cartridge.................................................................. 12-9
Inserting the new Copy/Print Cartridge............................................................ 12-9
Loading Staples ................................................................................................ 12-12
Finisher (optional) .......................................................................................... 12-12
Convenience Stapler (optional)...................................................................... 12-15
Fault Clearance Procedure................................................................................. 13-2
Clearing Jams...................................................................................................... 13-3
Problem Solving Tables ..................................................................................... 13-4
Fault Codes and Messages.............................................................................. 13-16
Table of Fault Codes...................................................................................... 13-16
Output Quality ................................................................................................... 13-19
Call for Service procedure ............................................................................... 13-20
14Specifications.............................................................................14-1
Machine Specifications ...................................................................................... 14-2
Electrical Specifications ................................................................................... 14-7
Specifications for the Embedded Fax Feature ................................................. 14-8
15Glossary......................................................................................15-1
Terms Defined ..................................................................................................... 15-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page ix
Page x
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Xerox Welcome Center
If after product installation further assistance is required,
please call our experts using the Xerox Welcome Center
telephone number. When telephoning, please quote the
machine serial number, which may be written in the space
below. The serial number is located behind the left hand front
cover, as shown:
Serial number:
_______________________________________
The Xerox Welcome Center telephone number is provided at
the time of product installation. For convenience and future
reference, please record the telephone number in the space
below:
Welcome Center Telephone Number:
Canada (English, French, and local Toronto) 800-939-3769
United States 800-821-2797
_______________________________________
Also, keep a record of any error messages. This information
can help problems to be resolved quickly.
Page 1-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Conventions
Throughout this User Guide, you will find that some terms are
used interchangeably:
¾ Paper is synonymous with media.
¾ Document is synonymous with original.
¾ Page is synonymous with sheet.
¾ Document Centre (DC) 440/432/430/426/425/420 is
synonymous with the machine.
Orientation
Orientation is used to mean the direction of images on the
page. When the image is upright, the paper (or other media)
can be one of two ways:
Long Edge Feed (LEF) / When observed from the front of the machine, paper or
Portrait originals with the long edges to the left and right of the paper
tray or document feeder.
Short Edge Feed (SEF) / When observed from the front of the machine, paper or
Landscape originals with the short edges to the left and right of the paper
tray or document feeder.
Use the diagram below for more information.
LEF Orientation
SEF Orientation
A
A
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 1-3
Bracket text typeface
The [Bracket Text] typeface is used to emphasize the
selection of a feature mode or button. For example:
¾ Select [Image Quality].
¾ Apply the new settings.
¾ Select [Save].
Italic typeface
The Italic typeface is used to emphasize a word or phrase. In
addition, references to other chapters and publications are
displayed in Italic typeface. For example:
- Always follow safety procedures when operating the
equipment.
- Refer to “Maintenance” on page 12-1, for information
about cleaning the Document Glass.
- For more information about the network options available,
refer to the System Administrator Guide.
Quick Pathway
In addition to the step by step instructions available throughout
this user guide, a summary of the steps is contained in the
Quick Pathway at the beginning of a chapter or section. After
becoming familiar with the procedures for a particular feature,
the Quick Pathway is a useful reminder of the steps required to
access a particular feature.
Quick Pathway
¾Select[Access]
on the Control Panel
¾Enter Key Operator
PIN
¾Select [Machine
Setups]
Page 1-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Notes
Notes are statements that provide additional information. For
example:
NOTE: If the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 does not include
the Finisher and/or High Capacity Feeder, ignore the first step.
Hints
Hints help users perform a task. For example:
HINT: Select the X / Y display areas to display a pop up
keypad which can be used to enter and save the values.
Cautions
Cautions are statements that suggest mechanical damage as
a result of an action. For example:
CAUTION:When cleaning the DC440/432/430/426/425/420,
do not use organic solvents or aerosol cleaners.
Warnings
Warnings are statements that alert users to the possibility of
personal damage. For example:
WARNING:This equipment must be connected to an
earthed mains socket outlet.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 1-5
Related Information Sources
Information available for the Document Centre 440/432/430/
426/425/420 consists of:
- This User Guide
- The On-line Help system
- The Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 ST
System Administration Guide
- The Xerox CentreWare Customer Documentation
NOTE: Please note that the screens shown in this user guide
apply to a fully configured DC440/432/430/426/425/420 and
therefore may not exactly represent the configuration being
used.
Page 1-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Safety Notes
Your Xerox product and supplies have been designed and
tested to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety
agency approval, and compliance to established
environmental standards. Please read the following
instructions carefully before operating the product and refer to
them as needed to ensure the continued safe operation of your
product.
The safety testing and performance of this product have
been verified using Xerox materials only.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on, or supplied
with the product.
This WARNING Mark alerts users to the possibility of
personal injury.
This WARNING Mark alerts users to heated surfaces.
WARNING: This product must be connected to a
protective earthing circuit.
This product is equipped with a 3-wire type plug, provided
with a protective earthing pin. This plug will fit only into an
earthed power outlet. This is a safety feature. To avoid risk of
electric shock, contact your electrician to replace the
receptacle if you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet.
Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to a
power source receptacle that lacks an earth connection
terminal.
This product should be operated from the type of power
source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the
type of power available, consult your local power company.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate
the product where persons will step or trip on the cord.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 1-7
Use of an extension cord with this product is not
recommended or authorised. Users should check building
codes and insurance requirements if a properly earthed
extension cord is to be used. Ensure that the total ampere
ratings of the products plugged into the extension cord do not
exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that
the total amperage of all products plugged into the wall outlets
does not exceed the outlet rating.
Disconnect Device for this product is the power cord. To
remove all electrical power to the product, disconnect the
power cord from the power receptacle.
Your equipment is equipped with an energy saving device to
conserve power when the machine is not in use. The machine
may be left on continuously.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning.
Always use materials specifically designated for this product.
Use of other materials may result in poor performance and
could create a hazardous situation.
Do not use aerosol cleaners. Follow the instructions in this
User Guide for proper cleaning methods.
Never use supplies or cleaning materials for purposes other
than those for which they were intended. Keep all supplies and
materials out of reach of children.
Do not use this product near water, wet locations, or outdoors.
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table.
The product may fall, causing personal injury or serious
damage to the product
Slots and Openings in the cabinet and in the back and sides
of the product are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable
operation of the product and to protect it from overheating,
these openings must not be blocked or covered. The product
should never be located near or over a radiator or heat register.
This product should not be placed in a built-in installation
unless proper ventilation is provided.
Never push objects of any kind into the slots of the product as
they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts
which could result in a fire or electric shock.
Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
Page 1-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Never remove covers or guards that require a tool for removal,
unless directed to do so in a Xerox approved maintenance kit.
Never defeat interlock switches. Machines are designed to
restrict operator access to unsafe areas. Covers, guards and
interlock switches are provided to ensure that the machine will
not operate with covers opened.
Do not put your hands into the fuser area, located just inside
the exit tray area, as you may be burned.
Quality Standards: The product is manufactured under a
registered ISO9002 Quality system.
If you need additional safety information concerning the
product or Xerox supplied materials you may call the
following number:
+44(0) 1707 353434
Safety Standards
This Xerox product is certified by the following Agency using
the Safety Standards listed.
Agency
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES
Standard
UL1950 3rd Edition
Certification is based on reciprocity agreements which include
requirements for Canada.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 1-9
Regulatory Information
FCC Part 15
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interferences at their own
expense.
Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically
approved by the Xerox Corporation may void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
WARNING:Shielded cables must be used with this
equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations.
ICES-003
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-
003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.
Page 1-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
FCC Part 68
Send Header Requirements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations
require all persons within the United States who send any
message via a facsimile machine to include an identifying
message in the transmission. The message must clearly
contain an identifier and telephone number for the entity
(business or individual) sending the message.
This facsimile machine provides the local ID and name
features required for the FCC regulation. To satisfy the FCC
regulation, the telephone number and name must be included
with the printed document. To comply with the FCC rules,
carefully read and follow the instructions listed in this document
to program the local ID and name.
Data Coupler Information
This Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420
machine contains an internal data coupler. Its use is restricted
by the FCC (Federal Communications Commission). To
comply with the FCC rules, you must carefully read and follow
the instructions listed below.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the
rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, the FCC registration number and Ringer
Equivalence Number (REN). If requested, provide this
information to your telephone company.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you
may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those
devices ring when your number is called. In most, but not all
areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices should not exceed
five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you may
connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should call
your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN
for your calling area.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 1-11
WARNING:Ask your local telephone company for the
modular jack type installed on your line. Connecting this
machine to an unauthorized jack can severely damage
telephone company equipment. You, not Xerox, assume
all responsibility and/or liability for any damage caused
by the connection of this machine to an unauthorized
jack.
You may safely connect the machine to the following standard
modular jack: USOC RJ-11C. Use the standard line cord (with
modular plugs) provided with the installation kit to connect it.
An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be
connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a
compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant.
Do not connect this machine to a party or coin operated phone
line.
Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox
representative or an authorized Xerox service agency. This
applies at any time during or after the service warranty period.
If unauthorized repair is performed, the remainder of the
warranty period is null and void.
If you find the telephone line is damaged or the telephone
company notifies you that your machine is causing damage,
disconnect the machine from the telephone line and call for
service. Do not reconnect the machine until necessary repairs
are made.
The telephone company will, where practical, notify you when
they need to temporarily disconnect service. However, if action
is reasonable and necessary, but prior notice is not practical,
they may still temporarily disconnect your service. In such
cases they must:
¾ Immediately notify you of their temporary action.
¾ Reconnect service when the source of damage is removed.
¾ Inform you of your rights to bring a complaint to the FCC
under FCC rules.
Page 1-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
The telephone company may make changes to its
communications facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures. Such action must be reasonable, required in the
operation of their business, and consistent with FCC rules.
They must give you prior written notification if the changes can:
¾ Make your machine incompatible with their equipment.
¾ Require modification or alteration of the machine.
¾ Otherwise physically affect performance of the machine.
WARNING:When programming emergency numbers and/
or making test calls to emergency numbers:-
- Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher
the reason for the call before hanging up.
- Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as
early morning hours or late evenings.
Canadian CSO3
Notice: The Industry Canada Label on the machine identifies
certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets certain telecommunications networks
protective, operational and safety requirements. Industry
Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the
user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is
permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be
installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some
cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single
line individual service may be extended by means of a certified
connector assembly (telephone extension cord).
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some
situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an
authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 1-13
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection the electrical
ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected
together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural
areas.
CAUTION:Users should not attempt to make such
connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician, as
appropriate.
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to
each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum
number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone
interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the
sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices
does not exceed 5.
Laser Safety
This product complies with safety standards and is certified as
a Class 1 Laser product under the US Department of Health
and Human Services (DHSS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and
Safety Act of 1968. This product does not emit hazardous laser
radiation.
CAUTION:Use of controls or adjustments or performance
of procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous exposure of laser light.
Since radiation emitted inside this product is completely
confined within the protective housing and external covers, the
laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase
of the user operation.
Page 1-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the
US Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for
laser products on August 1 1976. These regulations apply to
laser products marketed in the United States.The label on the
machine indicates compliance with CDRH regulations and
must be attached to laser products marketed in the United
States.
This product contains laser warning labels. These labels are
intended for use by Xerox Service Representatives and are
placed on or near panels or shields that require special tools for
removal. Do not remove any of the panels. There are no
operator serviceable areas inside these covers.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 1-15
Environmental Compliance
Energy Star®
Xerox Corporation designed this product to comply with the
®
guidelines of the ENERGY STAR program of the
Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR
®
ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.
Your Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 will be
delivered with the timer for switching to Low Power Mode from
the last copy/print out, set at 15 minutes. The time to switch to
power save (auto off/sleep) mode is set at 60 minutes from the
last copy/print out. A more detailed description of these modes
together with instructions on changing the default times to suit
your work pattern can be found in the “Power Save Modes” on
page 2-10 of this User Guide.
Environmental ChoiceM
Terra Choice Environmental Services, Inc., of Canada has
verified that this Xerox product conforms to all applicable
M
M
Environmental Choice EcoLogo requirements for minimized
impact to the environment.
Page 1-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Illegal Copying
Congress, by statute, has forbidden the copying of the
following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of
fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making
such copies.
¾ Obligations or Securities of the United States Government,
such as:
Certificates of Indebtedness
Coupons from Bonds
Silver Certificates
United States Bonds
Federal Reserve Notes
Certificates of Deposit
National Bank currency
Federal Reserve Bank Notes
Gold Certificates
Treasure Notes
Fractional Notes
Paper money
Bonds and obligations of certain agencies of the
government, such as FHA
Bonds (US Savings Bonds may be photographed only
for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign
for the sale of such bonds.)
Internal Revenue Stamps (If it is necessary to copy a
legal document on which there is a cancelled revenue
stamp, this may be done provided the reproduction of
the document is performed for lawful purposes.)
Postage Stamps, cancelled or uncanceled (For
philatelic purposes, postage stamps may be
photographed provided the reproduction is black and
white and less than 3/4 or more than
1 1/2 times the linear dimensions of the original.)
Postal Money Orders
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 1-17
Bills, checks, or drafts for money drawn by or on
authorized officers of the United States
Stamps and other representatives of value, of
whatever denomination, which may be or have been
issued under any Act of Congress
¾ Adjusted compensation Certificates for veterans of the
World Wars
¾ Obligations or Securities of any foreign government, bank,
or corporation
¾ Copyrighted material (unless permission of the copyright
owner has been obtained or the copying falls within the “fair
use” or library reproduction provisions of the copyright law).
Further information of these provisions may be obtained
from the Copyright Office, Library of Congress, Washington,
DC 20559 (circular R21)
¾ Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization. (Foreign
naturalization certificates may be photographed.)
¾ Passports (Foreign passports may be photographed.)
¾ Immigration papers
¾ Draft Registration cards
¾ Selective Service Induction papers which bear any of the
following information:
Registrant’s earnings or income
Registrant’s dependency status
Registrant’s court record
Registrant’s previous military service
Registrant’s physical or mental condition
NOTE: Exception: US Army and Navy discharge certificates
may be photographed.
Page 1-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Badges, identification cards, passes or insignias carried by
military or Naval personnel, or by members of the various
Federal Departments and Bureaus, such as the FBI and
Treasury (unless the photograph is ordered by the head of
such Department or Bureau)
Copying of the following is also prohibited in certain states:
automobile licences, driver’s licenses, and automobile
Certificates of Title. This list is not all-inclusive. In case of
doubt, consult your attorney.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 1-19
Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)
If a fault is detected in the power supply to the Document
Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420, a Ground Fault Interrupter
(GFI) device on the machine automatically removes all
electrical power. If power is interrupted, locate the GFI on the
right side of the machine, towards the back.
If the GFI has been activated:
- on the DC426/420 the switch will be in the down position.
- on the DC440/432/430/425 the switch will be in the left
position.
Flip the switch to restore power to the machine.
DC440/432/430/425
DC426/420
If the GFI interrupts power to the machine again, or if power
has not been restored by this procedure, call your Xerox
service representative.
Page 1-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
2 Product Overview
The Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 is not simply
a conventional copier. It is a digital device capable of being
used for copying, faxing, printing and scanning, dependent on
the configuration.
For more information on available options, contact the local
Xerox representative.
The graphic representations of the touch screen throughout
this User Guide are based on a fully configured Document
Centre 440/432/430/425 with the Copy mode as the default.
The appearance of the touch screens may differ slightly on
other models or configurations. However, feature descriptions
and functionality as described, remain the same.
NOTE: The available features are dependant on the model
and configuration purchased.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-1
Identifying the machine components
The following pages provide information about the Document
Centre components and control panel buttons as well as a
description of the services and modes available. Contact the
local Xerox Representative for more information.
Document Glass
(under the document feeder)
Document
Feeder
Touch
Screen
Control
Panel
Left
Tray
Center
Tray
On / Off Switch
(426/420)
Bypass
Tray
Left
Front
Cover
On / Off Switch
Paper
Trays
Duplex
Module
(440/432/430/425)
Page 2-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
NOTE: The Document Centre 425 Digital Copier is also
available as a single-sided copier only. The Document Feeder
will be replaced by a Document Glass Cover and a maximum
of 2 paper trays will be available. Limited features will be
available on this configuration.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-3
Optional Components
The graphic below shows some of the optional components
available. Depending on the Document Centre configuration
the following may be already be available.
Finisher
High Capacity
Feeder (HCF)
Duplex
Module
Paper Trays 3
& 4
Duplex module (DC420/425) Makes two-sided copies from one-sided and/or two-sided
documents. Refer to page 3-14 for more information.
NOTE: The Duplex Module is not an optional component on
the DC425 single-sided configuration.
Paper Tray 2 (426/420) Similar to Tray 1, these trays can hold a maximum of 500
Paper Trays 3 & 4 (DC432/430/ sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper. Refer to “Paper and other
425) media” on page 10-1 for more information.
Page 2-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
alternative to using labels. It can hold a maximum of 70
envelopes of 24lb (substance 24) paper at one time. The
envelope tray can only be used in place of tray 1. Refer to
“Paper and other media” on page 10-1 for more information.
Bypass Tray and Finisher or Left Tray. The tray can hold a
maximum of 2000 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper, 8 1/2”
x 11”, long edge feed. Refer to “Paper and other media” on
page 10-1 for more information.
Finisher The Finisher can stack a variety of paper sizes from 5 1/2” x 8
1/2” through 11 x 17” and can handle a maximum of 1000
sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper at one time. It can staple
up to 50 pages of 20lb (substance 20) paper in one set. Refer
NOTE: The Finisher Stand or the High Capacity Feeder must
also be fitted with the Finisher.
Tower Mailbox The Tower Mailbox is only available on the Copier/Printer,
Copier/Fax/Printer. On the DC440/432/430/425 each bin can
hold approximately 100 sheets of 5 1/2” x 8 1/2” through 11 x
17” paper. On the DC426/420 each bin can hold approximately
“Tower Mailbox” on page 8-5 for more information.
Convenience Shelf This two-tiered shelf attaches to the right hand side of the
machine. The shelf is useful as a work area.
Convenience Stapler If the Convenience Shelf is fitted, the Convenience Stapler can
also be installed to manually staple documents, or to staple
output if the Finisher option is not fitted. The stapler can handle
a maximum of 50 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper. Refer
to page 3-13 for more information.
NOTE: The Convenience Shelf can be installed without the
Convenience Stapler.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-5
Editing Kit Allows editing tasks to be carried out on part or all of a
document. For more information refer to “Edit (optional)” on
page 3-30.
fallback capability supporting baud rates of 2.4 kbps to 14.4
kbps on the DC426/420 and bit rates up to 33.6 kbps on the
DC440/432/430/425. For more information refer to “Fax” on
page 4-1.
Multiple Fax Line (DC440/432/ If the Fax option has been installed on the DC440/432/430/
430/425) 425, the Multiple Fax Line kit can also be purchased. This kit
enables the use of two telephone lines for sending and
receiving faxes. For more information refer to “Fax” on page 4-
1.
Hard Disk (DC426/420) The Digital Copier uses DRAM (Dynamic Random Access
Memory) for permanent and temporary storage. The optional
hard disk provides additional storage space for large or
complex jobs.
Page 2-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Power ON/OFF
Powering On
Ensure that the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 is connected to a
suitable power supply and that the power cord is fully plugged
in to the electrical outlet. For detailed technical information,
refer to “Specifications” on page 14-1. The DC440/432/430/
426/425/420 takes approximately 3 1/2 minutes to power ON
and complete a self test.
DC440/432/430/425
The 440/432/430/425 power
switch is located on the top of
the printer on the right hand
side.
¾ Locate the ON / OFF switch.
¾ Switch to I to turn the
machine on.
The DC440/432/430/425 digital copier will take approximately
55 seconds to power ON.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-7
DC426/420
On the DC426/420 the power
switch is located on the right
hand side of the printer.
¾ Locate the ON / OFF switch.
¾ Switch to I to turn the
machine on.
The DC426/420 digital copier will take approximately 59
seconds to power ON.
Page 2-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Powering Off
When powering off the DC440/432/430/426/425/420, the
machine remains on for approximately 10 seconds before the
power is terminated. The machine is storing files and preparing
for the shutdown.
CAUTION:Failure to leave at least 20 seconds between
repeated power off /on can result in damage to the DC440/
432/430/426/425/420 hard drive.
NOTE: If the Printer option is installed and the power is turned
off, the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 will remain on for
approximately 15 seconds before the power is terminated.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-9
Power Save Modes
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 has energy saver features
which significantly reduce the power consumption during
periods of inactivity. The Power Save Indicator is a light,
located on the lower-left portion of the control panel.
The Power Save feature operates in three modes:
- Stand-by
- Low Power
- Power Save (Auto Off/Sleep)
NOTE: The behavior of these modes will depend on the
configuration of the machine.
Power Save
Indicator light
Page 2-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Stand-by Mode
Prior to entering Low Power or Power Save (Auto Off/Sleep),
the machine is in Stand-by Mode whenever it is not copying,
faxing, scanning or printing a job. The touch screen is visible
and ready to be programmed.
Low Power Mode
As delivered, the machine automatically switches into Low
Power Mode 15 minutes after the last copy/print out. In this
mode, the touch screen is blank and the Power Save Indicator
light is on.
on the control panel is touched, the document feeder is loaded,
a paper tray opened, a job is submitted to the print queue (fax
receive or network print), or a fax or print job arrives in the print
queue. The machine responds within one second and all the
features are available within 30 seconds.
The factory default setting of 15 minutes is customer
changeable within the range of 5 to 240 minutes. For more
information refer to “Changing the Default Time Settings” on
page 2-12.
Power Save Mode (Auto Off/Sleep)
As delivered, the machine automatically switches into Power
Save (Auto Off/Sleep) Mode, 60 minutes after the last copy/
print out. In this mode the copier version of the DC 426/420
switches the Power ON/OFF switch to the off position. Any
stored jobs remain in the memory and the DC 426/420 returns
to an operational condition when powered ON.
In Power Save (Auto Off/Sleep) Mode on the copier/printer/fax
version of the DC 426/420 and all DC 440/432/430/425
configurations, the touch screen is blank and the Power Save
light is lit. The machine is re-activated if the touch screen or any
button on the control panel is touched, the document feeder is
loaded, a paper tray opened, a job is submitted to the print
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-11
queue (fax receive or network print), or a fax or print job arrives
in the print queue. The machine responds within one second
and all the features are available within 50 seconds.
NOTE: The machine will not exit Power Save (Auto Off/Sleep)
mode if a fax job arrives and the fax enabled trays are empty.
The job will be held in memory until either the control panel is
touched or paper is loaded.
The factory default setting of 60 minutes is customer
changeable within the range of 5 to 240 minutes, depending on
work pattern.
Changing the Default Time Settings
¾ Select [Access]
on
the control panel.
Page 2-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Enter the password using the
keypad and select [Enter].
NOTE: User access to Setups
is password protected. Please
contact the Key Operator or
refer to “Setups” on page 11-1
for assistance.
¾ Select [Machine Setups].
¾ Select [Timers].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-13
¾ Select the option required.
¾ The touch screen displays
the current timer value. Use
the scroll buttons to apply the
new setting and select
[Save].
¾ Select [Close].
¾ Select [Exit]. The touch
screen displays ‘Please
wait...exit routine in
progress’. After a few
seconds the screen reverts to
the standard display. The
timer settings have now been
changed.
Page 2-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Recycled Paper
The DC 440/432/430/426/425/420 has established
performance with the use of recycled paper with its consequent
benefits to the environment.
Xerox recommends the following recycled paper that can be
obtained both through Xerox and many other office suppliers.
- 3R6296 8 1/2”x 11”, 20lb 5000 sheets with 30% post
consumer waste
- 3R6299 11” x 17”, 20lb 2500 sheets with 30% post
consumer waste
The above is a small sample from a range of recycled media
available from Xerox - including a variety of different sizes,
weights and colors.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-15
Modes
There are three modes available on the machine:
- Features
- Job Status
- Machine Status.
The mode buttons access the screens which enable users to
program features, monitor the status of jobs on the machine
and obtain general information about the DC440/432/430/426/
425/420.
NOTE: The features available will depend on the machine
configuration.
Features button
Job Status button
Machine Status button
Page 2-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Features button
Select this button to access the feature screens. Each “screen”
is accessed by a tab. The first screen for each tabbed feature
contains all the basic settings required for each feature. For
a copy and the first Fax screen to send a fax. The additional
screens provide settings to allow further programming
selections.
Machines connected to the network are able to support two
types of walk up fax - Embedded Fax or Server Fax. Both fax
services can be installed on the machine BUT only one can be
enabled at any one time. Whichever service is enabled, the
Fax feature tab will be available for selection. Please refer to
“Fax” on page 4-1 for more information.
¾ Select [Features] on the
control panel to display the
default screen.
NOTE: The first Copy screen is
normally the default setting.
This can be changed by the
Key Operator.
All Services
The All Services button will be available for selection when the
touch screen is not able to display the feature buttons for all the
installed services.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-17
¾ Select [All Services].The
pop-up window will be
displayed.
¾ Select the Feature option
required or select [Close] to
cancel.
Job Status button
Use Job Status to check on the progress of a job and if
necessary to change its position in a queue.
¾ Select [Job Status] on the
control panel.
The Print Queue is the default
setting and will be automatically
displayed.
¾ Select [Other Queues] to
display the queues available.
NOTE: The queues available are dependent on the machine
configuration.
Print Queue Maintains pending and active jobs that are to be printed. These
include copy jobs, network print jobs, fax print jobs and report
jobs.
Completed Print Jobs Queue Maintains all print jobs that have been successfully completed,
canceled by a user or canceled due to a fault.
Fax Queue Maintains all pending Embedded Fax transmission jobs
including send, broadcast send, poll, multi-poll and any current
active Embedded Fax jobs. This queue will also include all Fax
Page 2-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
scan jobs for delayed Embedded Fax jobs including send,
Mailbox and polling reservation. Only outgoing Server Fax jobs
will be displayed in this queue.
Completed Fax Jobs Queue Maintains all Fax jobs that have been successfully completed,
canceled by a user or canceled due to a fault. Certain failed fax
jobs will be maintained in the machine memory and available
for re-submission. Inbound Server Fax jobs do not appear in
the queue.
Scan Queue Maintains all active and pending Network Scanning and E-mail
jobs.
Completed Scan Jobs Queue Maintains all Network Scanning and E-mail jobs that have
(440/432/430/425) been successfully completed, canceled by a user or canceled
due a fault.
Machine Status button
Displays information about the DC 440/432/430/426/425/420.
Select this button to confirm the paper supply, review the status
of faults and find information required for service calls.
NOTE: Machine Status cannot be accessed during a system
fault, when the confirmation window is displayed, or when the
Key Operator Tools is accessed on the touch screen.
¾ Select [Machine Status] on
the control panel. The screen
shown will be automatically
displayed.
¾ To exit Machine Status,
select [Job Status] or
[Features] at any time.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-19
Machine Information
Displays the Customer Support Number, Machine Serial
Number, and Software levels.
Paper Supply Status
Displays the status of each paper tray, the bypass tray, and the
optional high capacity feeder. It also displays the size, type,
and color of the media in each tray and whether or not
embedded fax printing is enabled for each tray (if embedded
fax is installed). The Key Operator sets the defaults and
enables specific paper for printing fax documents.
Page 2-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Faults
Displays a list of the six most recent faults, the date and time
of the code and the status (active or cleared). Select the Fault
Clearance Instructions button for assistance when clearing an
active fault.
Reports and Counters
Print Reports
Accesses the various reports available for printing.
- Options Report (DC 426/420) - lists the options currently
connected to the machine.
- Pending Jobs Report - lists the jobs that are still in
memory and the available memory.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-21
- Printer Configuration - lists the status of the printer
options, installed options, PCL options, PostScript options
and connectivity options.
NOTE: If enabled, the Printer Configuration Report will
automatically print after the machine has been successfully
powered up.
- PostScript Font List - lists the available PostScript fonts
for the printer.
- PCL Font List - lists the available PCL fonts for the printer.
Account Information
When the Auditron is enabled use this screen to review the limit
and current count for your account number.
Counters
Displays the total number of prints made on the machine.
Users can also review the counter for individual modes,
however if a mode is not installed on the machine the counters
button for that mode will not be displayed, for example if Fax is
not installed, the counters screen will not display a fax button.
On receipt of a Xerox meter card, check that the serial number
on the card matches that shown on the machine, if the
information is correct enter the Machine counter reading in the
relevant box and return the pre-paid card to Xerox.
Page 2-22
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Machine Status].
¾ Select [Reports &
Counters].
¾ Select [Counters].
¾ The ‘Total Pages Printed’
billing counter for the
machine will be displayed.
Enter this number on the
meter reading card.
¾ To review the counter for an
individual mode, select the
required feature button.
NOTE: If available, select
[Additional Counters] to
access more mode buttons.
¾ Select [Exit].
¾ To exit [Machine Status],
select either [Job Status] or
[Features].
NOTE: The Services button displays the number of copies/
prints made by the Xerox Service Representative working in
the diagnostics mode.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-23
System controls
Access button
- displays a pop-up
login window to access
the Set-up Tools used
to adjust the defaults of
the machine.
Language button -
Help (?) button -
accesses
additional
information about
a specific task.
changes the text to
an alternative
language (when
available).
Clear All (AC)
button - resets the
default settings and
displays the first
screen for the
current pathway.
Interrupt button -
temporarily
interrupts a job to
enable a priority job
to be programmed.
*(asterisk)
button - used to
indicate the
diallingcharacter.
Also used as a
wildcard speed
dial character.
Pause (Stop)
button - used to
temporarily stop a
job.
Start button -starts
a job.
Power Save
Indicator Light -
identifies when
the machine is in
Power Save (Auto
Off/Sleep) mode.
# (hash) button - used
to indicate the dialing
character, to designate
a group dial number,
also used when
Clear button -
used to delete a
numeric value or
the last digit
Dial Pause button -
used to enter a
pause in a
telephone number
when transmitting a
fax.
entered. Also
entering a password.
replacesthecurrent
value with a default
value.
Page 2-24
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Job Interrupt
Job Interrupt is used to temporarily suspend the current
copying/printing to allow an urgent copy job to be completed.
When using job interrupt only a limited range of features will be
available for programming.
The System Administrator can set up Job Interrupt as follows:
Interrupt on Set Boundary the machine will finish printing the current set.
Interrupt on Page Boundary the machine will finish printing the current page.
¾ Select [Job Interrupt]. The
indicator light will be lit.
NOTE: The Document Centre
identifies a convenient point to
interrupt the current job.
¾ Program the job.
¾ Select [Start]. The interrupt
job will be completed.
¾ Select [Job Interrupt] and
follow the screen messages
to continue the interrupted
job.
Job Interrupt button
NOTE: Interrupt jobs cannot be promoted, released or deleted
in the Print Queue.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-25
Auditron Access Screen
The Auditron is a feature of the machine which automatically
tracks usage. If Auditron is enabled, an account number must
be entered. For account number allocation, or further
information about the Auditron, please contact the Key
Operator.
¾ Use the numeric keypad to
enter the account number.
¾ Select [Enter].
¾ Make feature selections as
required to complete the job.
¾ To exit the account, select
[Clear All] twice.
Whilst still logged on, use the following steps to review the
status of the account.
¾ Select [Machine Status] on
the control panel to the right
of the touch screen.
¾ Select [Account
Information].
¾ The screen shown will be
displayed with the count for
Copy and/or Fax jobs
completed and the limit set
for the account.
¾ Select [Exit] to close the
screen.
Page 2-26
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Information Sources
In addition to the graphic and message display, the following
information sources are designed to provide guidance and
information when making copies.
Using the Help (?) button
The Help (?) button on the control panel, provides additional
information about a specific task. The Help system also
provides context-sensitive help - specific information to the
task being carried out. The help screens can be reviewed in
Features, Job Status and Machine Status modes.
¾ Select [Help] at the top left of
the numeric keypad.
¾ Select the feature you want
more information about.
¾ If available select
- Page to scroll through the
options page by page,
- System to gain help about
the machine,
- Index for a list of features
available.
¾ Select [Close] to exit the
help screens.
NOTE: Jobs cannot be programmed when using the Help
screen.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 2-27
Labels
Located on the machine at point-of-need throughout the
machine, labels provide guidance when, for example, clearing
paper jams or loading documents.
User Documentation
There are 2 books available which fully describe the operation
of the system.
- User Guide: All operational, maintenance and machine
setup procedures.
- DC440/432/430/426/425/420STSystemAdministration
Guide: Information on Network installation and setup
procedures.
Page 2-28
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Copying procedure
Before making copies on the DC440/432/430/426/425/420,
identify what is to be copied and the number of copies required.
Use the following steps to make a copy using the Document
Centre.
Quick Pathway
¾Load documents.
¾Press [Features].
NOTE: If the Auditron has been enabled on the machine, an
account number may be required before programming can
about the Auditron, please contact the Key Operator.
¾If necessary select
[Copy].
¾Select the Copy
features required.
HINT: When programming a copy job on a network
connected machine, select Job Interrupt first. The Document
Centre will not complete any network jobs allowing the copy
job to be programmed and completed without interruption.
Refer to “Job Interrupt” on page 2-25 for more information.
1. Load the documents
A choice of document input areas is available. These are:
- A document feeder for single or multiple documents
- A document glass for single documents or bound
originals.
NOTE: A document glass cover will be fitted on the DC425
cabinet configuration.
Document Feeder
Up to 50 documents can be scanned at one time using the
document feeder. Ensure the documents are of the same size,
in good condition and all staples or paper clips removed.
Page 3-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
NOTE: To reduce the risk of document feeder jams, place
folded or creased documents on the Document Glass and
make a copy. Replace folded or creased documents with the
new copy.
Documents should be 16 - 32lb (substance 16 - 32) and 8 1/2”
x 5 1/2” through 8 1/2” x 11” long edge feed or 5 1/2” x 8 1/2”
through 11” x 17” short edge feed.
The Document Feeder senses only standard sizes. If the
documents include non-standard sizes, copy them from the
Document Glass. If the sensor cannot detect the size, it scans
the entire glass area and prints on 8 1/2” x 11” inch paper.
inch.
NOTE: If feeding Computer Fan Fold through the Document
Feeder always remove the perforated feed edge first.
NOTE: For information about copying mixed size originals
using the document feeder please refer to page 3-23. For
instructions on faxing mixed size originals using the document
feeder refer to page 4-33.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-3
¾ Before placing the
documents into the document
feeder, remove all staples
and paper clips.
¾ Insert the documents neatly
into the document feeder,
face up. The first page should
be on top with the headings
towards the back or left of the
machine.
¾ Align the stack with the left
and rear edges of the
document feeder tray and
position the guide to just
touch the edge of the
documents.
Light
¾ Check the green light on the
top rear of the document
feeder. When the documents
are positioned correctly, it will
light up.
Document Feeder Guide
When Auto paper is selected, the document feeder senses the
size and orientation of the documents, then checks the paper
trays to find one that corresponds. The size and orientation are
displayed in the message area in the upper left hand corner of
the touch screen.
NOTE: This applies when paper supply is set to Auto and
used with standard document sizes. For non-standard sizes,
manually select the paper tray required.
Document Glass
The document glass should be used for single pages or bound
originals up to a maximum of 11” x 17” size.
Page 3-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
.
¾ Raise the document feeder or
the document glass cover, if
fitted.
¾ Place the document face
down onto the document
glass, aligned with the tip of
the registration arrow near
the top left of the document
glass.
¾ Lower the document feeder.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-5
Constant Velocity Transport Glass
The Constant Velocity Transport (CVT) glass is the narrow
strip of glass located at the left hand side of the document
glass. When documents are fed from the document feeder, the
CVT glass automatically scans the images into memory, and
does not apply to documents placed on the glass.
Constant Velocity
Transport Glass
2. Select the Features button
¾ Select [Features] located on
the left of the numeric
keypad. Ensure that the first
Copy screen is displayed.
Page 3-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Clear All] once to
cancel any previous screen
programming selections.
NOTE: Selecting Clear All twice
will clear all the programming
pathways and return the
machine to its default status.
Features Button
Clear All Button
3. Select the features
The features available on the first Copy screen are those used
most often. Many of the features contain a selection called
Other. Select this option to access additional programming
options.
NOTE: Only those features relevant to the machine
configuration will be available.
¾ Select the button for the
feature required. The button
changes to white. If Other is
selected, select [Save] to
confirm the selected feature
or [Cancel] to return to the
previous screen.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-7
available on the touch screen please refer to the following
pages:
- Output - page 3-10
- Sides Imaged - page 3-14
- Reduce / Enlarge - page 3-16
- Paper Supply - page 3-18
- Image Quality - page 3-20
4. Enter the quantity
DC440/432/430/425 On the DC440/432/430/425 the maximum copy quantity is 999.
DC426/420 On the DC426/420 the maximum copy quantity is 250.
¾ Use the numeric keypad to
enter the number of copies
required. The number
entered is displayed in the
top right hand corner of the
touch screen.
To cancel an incorrect entry,
select [C] and enter the correct
quantity.
Page 3-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
5. Select Start
¾ Select [Start]. Each
document is scanned once
only. The size and orientation
are displayed in the upper left
hand corner of the touch
screen.
If a resource problem or
programming conflict prevents
the job completing, a message
will be displayed. Follow the
message to resolve the
problem.
On completion, remove the
scanned documents from under
the document feeder or from the
document glass.
Start button
6. Identify the copy job in the Print Queue
control panel to display the
Print Queue.
¾ The job will be displayed in
the queue. If there are no
jobs in the queue, the job
may have already been
processed.
NOTE: Refer to “Managing
Copy Jobs” on page 3-53 for
more detailed information.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-9
Standard Features - Copy
Use the first Copy screen to select the standard features for a
copy job. For more information about the features available
refer to the following:
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
Output - page 3-10
Sides Imaged - page 3-14
Reduce / Enlarge - page 3-16
Paper Supply - page 3-18
Image Quality - page 3-20
¾If necessary select
[Copy].
¾Select the features
available on the first
[Copy] screen.
NOTE: Only those features relevant to the machine
configuration will be available.
Output
Depending on the machine configuration the Document Centre
can be installed with a Tray, a Left Tray and a Finisher.
NOTE: A6 size paper should not be fed to the Finisher.
The Center Tray is the default output tray. Output will be
delivered face down and offset to the Center Tray. Copy sets
delivered to the Left Tray will be face up and are not offset.
Page 3-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
NOTE: The Left Tray will not be available when custom size
paper has been programmed.
Output Icon
HINT: Use the Output Icon located on the lower left hand side
of the screen to quickly and easily switch from the Center Tray
to the Left Tray.
Collated
This option delivers the specified number of copy sets to the
Center Tray in the same order as the documents. If selecting
two copies of a three-page document, the order of the output
will be pages 1-2-3,1-2-3.
1,2,3.
1,2,3.
Uncollated
This option delivers the copies to the Center Tray in the order
based on the total number of copies for each document. The
order of the output for two copies of a three-page document will
be 1-1, 2-2, 3-3.
3,3..
2,2..
1,1..
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-11
Stapled (optional)
If the Finisher has been fitted, the Stapled option will be
available.
NOTE: The Finisher is not available on the DC425 single-
sided configuration.
1,2,3.
The Finisher can staple either 8 1/2” x 11” x 17” in sets of 2 to
50 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper either automatically or
manually. The staple cartridge holds 5000 staples.
NOTE: Uncollated is not available for stapled copies.
Automatic Stapling using the Finisher
Automatic stapling occurs when the stapled option has been
selected on the touch screen.
Manual Stapling using the Finisher
The Finisher stapler can also be used to staple documents
manually. Use the following steps to manually staple a set of
documents.
¾ Select and release the button
on the top of the Finisher.
The green light next to the
button is lit.
NOTE: If a job is currently in
process, the light will flash -
wait until the job finishes.
Page 3-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Place the documents face
down and long edge feed
over the green rectangle with
the left edge of the
documents against the tab of
the Staple Cartridge Door.
¾ Slide the documents forward
until you hear the click of the
staple being inserted. The
staple is inserted in the upper
left corner of the documents.
¾ Remove the stapled set from
the Finisher.
Convenience Stapler (optional)
The Convenience Stapler is an optional extra and can be
installed if the Convenience Shelf is fitted. It attaches to the
right hand corner at the rear of the shelf and is positioned so
that documents can be stapled straight or at an angle.
The Convenience Stapler can staple sets of 2 to 50 sheets of
20lb (substance 20) paper. The staple cartridge holds 5000
staples.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-13
¾ With the documents face up,
slide the corner to be stapled
into the stapler.
¾ The stapler will automatically
staple the documents.
• During stapling the
indicator light on the left
hand side of the stapler will
be lit.
¾ Remove the stapled set from
the Convenience Stapler.
Sides Imaged
Up to 50 double-sided copies, ranging in size from 8 1/2” x 5 5
1/2” through 11 x 17” can be made automatically from one or
two-sided documents.
• 1
• 1
• 2
1: single-sided copies from single-sided documents.
2: double-sided copies from single-sided documents.
2: double-sided copies from double-sided
documents.
• 2
1: single-sided copies from double-sided documents.
NOTE: The machine copies the second side of a document
first. When making double-sided copies using drilled or pre-
printed paper, load the paper the opposite way round to the
single sided copying instruction label on the tray.
HINT: When using the 1
2 option and the document glass,
the machine will display a message when it is ready to scan
side 2.
Page 3-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
NOTE: The 2-sided options are not available on the DC425
single-sided configuration.
Orientation
Select the Other option to access the Orientation features.
DC440/432/430/425 Select the Other option and then either 1
2, 2
1 and 2
‘ 2 to access the following orientation options available:
Head to Head—the output will be the same orientation as the
documents.
o
Head to Toe—the output will be rotated 180 on the second
side.
Portrait—the image appears in the portrait orientation.
Landscape—the image appears in the landscape orientation.
The following illustration depicts the results for Head to Head
or Head to Toe selections for Portrait and Landscape images.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-15
Portrait ImagesLandscape Images.
Head to Head
for binding on the long edge
Head to Head
for binding on the short edge
A
B
A
B
Head to Toe
for binding on the short edge
Head to Toe
for binding on the long edge
A
A
B
B
DC426/420 select the Other option and then 1
2 to access the following
orientation options available:
Head to Head—the output will be the same orientation as the
documents.
o
Head to Toe—the output will be rotated 180 .
NOTE: Inserts can not be programmed with 1
2. Bound
Originals and Build Job are not available with 1
2 selected
when using the document glass. Tabbed stock, envelopes and
transparencies will not feed through the Duplex Module.
Reduce/Enlarge
In addition to 100% size for size copies, reduced or enlarged
copies can be produced by selecting one of the Reduce /
Enlarge options. If the media loaded is the same size as the
documents, but does not match the orientation, the DC440/
432/430/426/425/420 can rotate the image so that it fits
correctly on to the paper. Rotation will only occur when Auto
Reduce/Enlarge or Auto Paper Supply, but not both, is
selected.
Page 3-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Auto] or one of the
presets options.
Reduce / Enlarge options
100% size for size copies.
Auto automatically reduces / enlarges a document to fit on the paper
size selected.
NOTE: When Auto Reduce/Enlarge is selected, the machine
automatically selects 8 1/2” x 11” long edge feed paper. If
selecting Auto Reduce/Enlarge and 8 1/2” x 11” long or short
edge paper supply, the machine automatically rotates the
image 90° to match the orientation of the 8 1/2” x 11”
documents and prints on to 8 1/2” x 11” long edge feed paper.
However, when using the Bypass Tray ensure that the paper
is loaded short edge feed. Feeding paper long edge feed will
cause a mismatch with the reduction/enlargement selection.
Presets displays the two most frequently used preset reduce / enlarge
settings. The presets are set up by the Key Operator.
Other used to specify a magnification not listed, or to select normal or
custom settings.
- Normal — reduces or enlarges the length and width of a
document by a specific amount. 100%, Auto and the
presets are also available. For non-standard sizes, use
the scroll buttons to choose a specific enlargement or
reduction in 1% increments.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-17
HINT: To save time use the pop-up keypad on the touch
screen instead of the scroll buttons to insert values. Select the
display box for the size selections (the small rectangle to the
left of the scroll buttons) and a keypad will be displayed. Enter
the values and select Save.
- Custom — used to reduce or enlarge a document in non-
equal proportions. Again, 100% and Auto are available to
reset the magnification after using a custom setting.
HINT: When Custom Reduce/Enlarge is selected, the
machine does not rotate the image to match the orientation of
the paper. If Auto Custom Reduce/Enlarge is selected, the
machine does rotate the image.
Paper Supply
The media loaded in the paper trays determines the sizes
displayed in the Paper Supply selection on the touch screen.
transparency is displayed.
When a tray is opened or paper is loaded in to the Bypass Tray,
a pop-up window ‘Tray Attributes’ will be displayed on the
touch screen. When changing the type or color of stock in the
tray, the tray must be programmed to match the media being
loaded. If the type or color of stock is not being changed, select
Confirm to close the window.
NOTE: For information about loading paper, refer to “Paper
and other media” on page 10-1.
Page 3-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Open the paper tray. The tray
attributes window is
displayed.
¾ Load the tray.
¾ If the paper type or colour
has been changed, select
[Change Type or Colour]
and programme the new
settings. Select [Save].
¾ Select [Confirm] to carry on
with the job.
NOTE: The size and orientation is determined for all trays
except the Bypass Tray.
Paper Supply options
Auto accepts the default setting (standard white paper) for the paper
supply. If a specific paper size is not selected, the DC440/432/
430/426/425/420 defaults to the size it senses from the
document and sends the output to the Center Tray.
Presets displays the most regularly used paper supply options. The
presets are set up by the Key Operator.
Other displays a list of all the trays and the paper type, color, size and
orientation loaded.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-19
Image Quality
Use the image quality settings to adjust the quality of the
output.
Image Quality options
Text used for scanning text, solids, line art and halftones.
Auto automatically adjusts the image quality based on the attributes
of the document. Auto can also be used to make copies of
documents that contain halftones and different images.
Photo used for scanning continuous-tone photographs and high-
quality, high-frequency halftones.
HINT: For best results, copy a maximum of 5 photographs in
one job, unless the machine has additional memory.
Lighter/Darker scroll bar allows manual adjustment to be made to the lightness and
darkness of the output.
Scroll bar
Page 3-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Added Features - Copy
The Added Features tab offers additional programming
features for a copy job. When selected, a series of tabs is
displayed.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
Image Adjustment - page 3-22
Output Format - page 3-34
Job Assembly - page 3-48
¾If necessary select
[Copy].
¾Select [Added
Features].
NOTE: Only those features relevant to the machine
configuration will be available.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-21
Image Adjustment tab - Copy
For more information about the features available refer to the
following:
Original Size - page 3-22
Bound Originals -page 3-25
Image Shift -page 3-27
Expert Image Quality - page 3-28
Erase - page 3-29
Edit (optional) - page 3-30
¾ Select [Added Features].
The Image Adjustment
screen will be displayed.
Original Size (DC440/432/430/425)/Original Input (DC426/420)
Use this feature to copy and/or manipulate non-standard size
documents from the Document Feeder and Document Glass.
Use the following steps to program this feature on the DC440/
432/430/425.
NOTE: This feature is known as Original Input on the DC426/
420.
Page 3-22
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Place a document on the
document glass and select
the features required.
¾ Select [Original Size].
¾ Select the option required.
Original Size (DC440/432/430/425)/Original Input
(DC426/420) Options
Auto automatically determines the size of the document being
copied and selects a paper supply source of the same size.
The machine cannot sense the size of non-standard
documents.
Original Size indicates the document size, or the size you want the
Document Centre to scan, if the document is a non-standard
size. Choose from the preset sizes listed, or using the scroll
arrows enter the X and Y values. This feature can be used with
the Document Feeder or the Document Glass.
NOTE: The paper tray sensors can detect only the size of the
paper loaded. They cannot detect paper attributes, such as
transparencies, color stock, or drilled stock. The attributes
must be selected.
Mixed Size use this option to feed documents of different sizes through the
document feeder. To produce size for size or reduced /
enlarged copies. To enable this feature documents must be
loaded in to the Document Feeder.
NOTE: The lead edges must have the same dimensions. For
example 11” x 17” short edge feed can be loaded with 8 1/2” x
11” long edge feed, but 11” x 17” short edge feed cannot be
loaded with 8 1/2” x 11” short edge feed.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-23
To produce size for size copies
¾ Load the documents.
¾ Select [Auto] paper supply.
¾ Select [Added Features].
¾ Select [Original Size].
¾ Select [Mixed Size] and select [Save].
¾ Enter the quantity and select [Start].
NOTE: Inserts, Booklet Creation and N Up (2 Up on the
DC426/420) cannot be used with Mixed Size Originals.
Page 3-24
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
To produce reduced / enlarged copies
¾ Load the documents.
¾ Select the paper size required.
¾ Select [Added Features].
¾ Select [Original Size].
¾ Select [Mixed Size] and select [Save].
¾ Enter the quantity and select [Start].
NOTE: Inserts, Booklet Creation and N Up cannot be used
with Mixed Size Originals.
Bound Originals
Select Bound Originals to make copies of pages from bound
documents or magazines using the Document Glass.
¾ Place the bound document
face down on to the
document glass. Close the
cover until it rests on the
bound document. Do not
force it shut.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-25
¾ Select the features required.
¾ Select [Added Features].
¾ Select [Bound Originals]
and select the features
required.
¾ Select [Save].
¾ Select [Start].
Bound Originals options
Off the feature is not available.
Side 1 copies only the page on the left when looking at the open book,
face up.
Side 2 copies only the page on the right when looking at the open
book, face up.
1 and 2 copies both pages of an open book and places each page on
a separate sheet of paper.
Book size use this option if the open book size is anything other than 11”
x 17”.
Page 3-26
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Gutter Erase erases up to 2 in from the gutter area down the center of a
bound document. When the 1 and 2 option is selected any
amount from 0 - 2 in can be entered.
Image Shift
Use this feature to change the position of the image on a page.
¾ Select the features required.
¾ Load the document. Ensure
that the documents are in the
same orientation as the
media loaded in the paper
trays.
¾ Select [Added Features].
¾ Select [Image Shift] and the
option required.
¾ Select [Save] and [Save]
again.
¾ Enter the quantity and select
[Start].
Image Shift options
Off the feature is not available.
Auto Center automatically shifts the image to the center of the paper.
Margin Shift copies the image to a specific area. Unless the new location is
specified, the output will be displayed on the page just as it is
on the document.
- Side 1: (the default setting) shifts the image to the left or
right, up or down for the first page of the document being
copied. The image can be shifted up to 2 in.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-27
- Side 2: shifts the image to the left or right, up or down for
the second page of the document being copied. The
image can be shifted up to 2 in.
Independent: Use this to set different image
placement options for side 2 of the documents.
Mirror Side 1: sets the image shift selections for side
2 the same as those entered for side 1.
Expert Image Quality
Use this feature when documents require more than the basic
image quality adjustment.
¾ Select the features required.
¾ Load the document. Ensure
that the documents are in the
same orientation as the
media loaded in the paper
trays.
¾ Select [Added Features].
¾ Select [Expert Image
Quality] and the option
required.
¾ Select [Save] and [Save]
again.
¾ Enter the quantity and select
[Start].
Page 3-28
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Expert Image Quality options
Sharpness adjusts the sharpness of the image. This feature is used to
increase the sharpness of fine lines and details, or to decrease
the sharpness for a smooth, uniform appearance. However, it
is advisable not to decrease the sharpness too much, the copy
might appear distorted. Normal is the default setting.
Gray Scale Copying (DC426/ use when copying documents containing highlights and
420) shadows. This option provides better reproduction of
graylevels. Images tend to be sharper and have less contrast.
NOTE: 1 2, 2 2, Transparencies, 2 Up, Booklet Creation,
Build Job or Annotation cannot be used with Gray Scale
Copying.
Auto Exposure when copying text images from colored paper documents, this
feature enables users to obtain a copy with a clean, white
background.
Erase
Use this feature to erase unwanted marks such as hole punch
impressions from the edge of the copy.
¾ Load the documents in the
same orientation as the
selected Paper Tray.
¾ Select the features required.
¾ Select [Added Features].
¾ Select [Image Adjustment].
¾ Select [Erase].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-29
¾ Select [Border Erase] or
[Edge Erase].
¾ Use the scroll arrows to enter
the amount of erase required.
¾ Select [Save].
¾ Enter the quantity and select
[Start].
Erase options
Off the feature is not available.
Border Erase to erase equal amounts from all edges, up to 2 in.
Edge Erase to erase a specific amount from each edge of the copy. Up to
2 in can be applied to each edge.
Edit (optional)
Use the Editing Kit to change the appearance of a document
copy. The kit is supplied with an orange editing marker.
Markers other than the one supplied can be used.
NOTE: When editing, keep the Document Glass closed,
unless editing a bound document or using the Original Size
feature. Do not select Interrupt or Pause while scanning a
document.
HINT: The Editing feature will not function if the original is not
white, for example when using recycled paper or colored
originals. If the Editing feature is not working properly, or if the
edit marks are not dark, replace the orange marker. Also,
avoid placing edit marks within approximately 1/4 of an inch of
the edge of the document.
Page 3-30
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
DC440/432/430/425 there is a choice of two edit options - Area Edit or Page Edit.
DC426/420 there is a only one choice available - Edit
Area Edit (DC440/432/430/425)
¾ To protect the document
make a copy first.
¾ Use the orange editing
marker, draw around the
areas to be printed, or draw a
thick line through the areas.
Press firmly on the edit
marker. The line indicating
the area to be printed must
be dark, without any breaks.
NOTE: There is no limit to the
number of markings.
¾ Place the marked copy on to
the Document Glass.
¾ Select [Added Features]
and then [Image
Adjustment].
¾ Select [Edit].
¾ Select [Area Edit].
¾ Select the option required
and select [Save].
¾ Select [Start].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-31
Area Edit options
Off the feature is not available.
Delete Inside scans everything outside the orange lines and ignores
everything inside. The center area will be blank.
Delete Outside scans everything inside the orange lines and ignores
everything outside. The outside area will be blank.
Centring (DC440/432/430/425) centres the image from inside the marker area onto the output
paper. Areas outside the marker area are deleted.
Inversion (DC440/432/430/425) changes all the black images within the marker area to white
and all the white images to black.
Page Edit (DC440/432/430/425)
This feature does not require the use of a marker pen, hence
pre-scan is not required. The editing function selected will be
applied to the entire page. The Document Glass or the
Document Feeder can be used with Page Edit.
¾ Load the document in the
Document Feeder or place it
on the Document Glass.
¾ Select [Added Features]
and then [Image
Adjustment].
¾ Select [Edit].
¾ Select [Page Edit].
¾ Select the option you want to
use and select [Save].
¾ Select [Start].
Page 3-32
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page Edit options
Off the feature is not available.
Inversion changes all the black images on the page to white and all the
white images to black.
Edit (DC426/420)
Edit is available on the DC426/420. For instructions on
programming the Edit option, refer to “Area Edit (DC440/432/
430/425)” on page 3-31.
Edit options
Off the feature is not available.
Delete Inside scans everything outside the orange lines and ignores
everything inside. The center area will be blank.
Delete Outside scans everything inside the orange lines and ignores
everything outside. The outside area will be blank.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-33
Output Format - Copy
enhance the appearance of a copy job. For more information
about the features available refer to the following:
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features]
button on the control
panel.
Transparencies - page 3-34
N Up (2 Up - DC426/420) - page 3-36
Annotation - page 3-38
¾If necessary select
[Copy].
Inserts - page 3-42
¾Select [Added
Features].
Booklet Creation - page 3-44
Covers (DC440/432/430/425) - page 3-45
¾Select [Output
Format].
Transparencies
This feature enables copying on to transparency stock,
placement of dividers between the pages and making hard
copy sets for handouts.
NOTE: For information about loading transparency stock
please refer to “Paper and other media” on page 10-1.
Page 3-34
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Load the documents in the
document feeder.
¾ Make the required feature
selections.
¾ Select [Output Format].
¾ Select [Transparencies].
Following the instructions,
select the option required.
¾ Load the transparency stock.
¾ Programme [Change Tray
Attributes]:
• Select [Type]. Use the up /
down scroll arrows to
display the transparency
option. Select
[Transparency] andselect
[Save].
• Select [Color] then [Clear]
and then [Save].
¾ Select [Start].
NOTE: A maximum quantity of
1 can be selected.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-35
Transparency options
Off the feature is not available.
Blank Dividers places a blank sheet of paper between each transparency.
No Dividers prints transparencies with no dividers, Copy Sets can still be
selected.
Printed Dividers an additional paper copy is automatically inserted after each
transparency.
Copy Sets prints additional paper sets of the transparencies. Select Copy
Sets and use the number keypad to enter the quantity required.
HINT: If a paper tray has been loaded and the tray attributes
have been programmed it is not necessary to assign a tray for
transparencies. The DC440/432/430/426/425/420
automatically detects the tray that contains the
transparencies.
NOTE: To avoid overheated or distorted transparencies do not
copy onto transparencies without selecting Transparencies
first.
N Up (2 Up - DC426/420)
DC440/432/430/425 This feature prints two or four independent documents on to
one sheet of paper. The DC440/432/430/425 reduces/
enlarges the images as needed to print them either in
landscape or portrait orientation on one page based on the
paper supply selected.
DC426/420 this feature is available as 2 Up. It enables two independent
documents to be printed side by side on to one sheet of paper.
It reduces / enlarges the images as needed to display them in
landscape orientation on one page.
Page 3-36
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
NOTE: 2
1, Bound Originals, Image Shift, Transparencies,
Booklet Creation, Gray Scale Copying (DC426/420), Build
Job, Mixed Size Originals or Annotation cannot be used with
this feature.
Use the following steps to program N Up on the DC440/432/
430/425.
¾ Load the documents in the
document feeder. Documents
must be loaded long edge
feed.
¾ Make the required feature
selections for the job. Select
[Paper Supply] and the
paper size required.
¾ Select [Added Features]
and then [Output Format].
¾ Select [N Up].
¾ Select either [2 Up] or [4 Up].
¾ Select landscape or portrait
and then [Save].
¾ Enter the quantity.
Select [Start].
On the DC426/420:
¾ Select [Added Features]
and then [Output Format].
¾ Select [2 Up].
¾ Select [On].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-37
Annotation
Use this feature to add the date, page numbers and a comment
to the copy output.
NOTE: N Up (2 Up on the DC426/420), Booklet Creation,
Bound Document, Uncollated, custom size documents and
envelopes are not available with Annotation.
¾ Load the documents.
¾ Make the required feature
selections.
¾ Select [Added Features].
¾ Select [Output Format].
¾ Select [Annotation]. The
Annotation options will be
displayed.
¾ Select the option required
and follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.
¾ Select [Save].
Page 3-38
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Annotation options
Date prints the current date, based on the machine settings.
On the DC440/432/430/425 the date is added to the top or
bottom of a page on the left, right or center . On the DC426/420
the date can be added to the left, right or center of the top of a
page only.
Page Numbering prints page numbers.
On the DC440/432/430/425 the page number is added to the
DC426/420 page numbers can be added to the left, right, or
center of the top of a page only.
Comments prints a comment on the document. On the DC440/432/430/
425 the comment is added to the top or bottom of a page on
the left, right, or center . On the DC426/420 a comment can be
added to the left, right, or center of the top of a page only.
Choose a programmed comment or create one by selecting
Enter. Refer to the instructions on page 3-40 for creating a
comment.
Format (DC440/432/430/425) there are three options available. Each option is available with
any one of the annotations.
- orientation informs the machine of the orientation
(landscape or portrait) of the document. The machine
then uses this information to determine where to place the
annotation.
- font size offers a choice of two fonts. Small font size is set
at 72 dots and the large font size is set at 144 dots per
inch.
- write mode prints the annotation on to the page as either
transparent or opaque. Selecting Transparent means that
the image on the document is not deleted and the
annotation is placed on top of the document image.
Selecting Opaque means that the annotation replaces the
document image.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-39
HINT: If the document image extends to the top edge of the
page, reduce the image to 90% of its document size to make
room for the annotation.
If the same position is inadvertently selected for the date, page
numbering and comment, they will be displayed in the default
order: comment (left), page number (center) and date (right).
When date is selected there is a choice of format - MM/DD/YY
or DD/MM/YY.
NOTE: When loading documents long edge feed, the
annotation can only be printed at the top of the page.
Annotation is not available on the landscape edge of any
document over 8.5x11inches in size.
Programming a new comment
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 can store up to 8
programmed messages (up to 40 characters each on the
DC440/432/430/425 and up to 20 characters each on the
DC426/420).
¾ If Off is selected, select
comment and the Document
Centre will display the list.
¾ Select an empty slot in the
Comment List.
¾ Select [Enter].
Page 3-40
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Use the pop-up keypad to
enter a new comment. Select
[More Characters] to use
additional characters.
If an incorrect entry is made,
select the
button to
backspace.
¾ Select [Save].
¾ The comment will be
displayed in the list.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-41
Inserts
This feature enables a different type of stock to be
automatically inserted within a set. Up to 10 inserts can be
added per copy set.
When using the DC440/432/430/425 two insert trays are
available for programming. The paper tray(s) selected must
match in size and orientation with the paper tray being used for
the main body of the job.
NOTE: 1
2 and 2
1 and Platen configurations cannot be
used with Inserts.
¾ Load the insert stock into the
required paper tray.
¾ Program the Tray Attributes
window and select [Save].
¾ Select the features required.
¾ Select [Added Features]
and then [Output Format].
¾ Select [Inserts].
¾ Select the option required.
Page 3-42
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Working from the beginning
of the document set, count
through to the first insert.
¾ Using the arrow buttons scroll
through to the required page
number.
NOTE: If the insert is to be
blank, add a blank sheet to the
document set. For printed
inserts enter the page number
of the page as it appears in the
documents.
¾ Select [Add Insert]. The
insert programmed will
appear in the review window.
To correct an error, select
[Delete Last Insert].
¾ If necessary, select the paper
tray in the Insert Tray list that
the insert stock is to be fed
from.
NOTE: When using both insert
trays, switch between the Insert
Tray buttons to enter the insert
number and apply the
programming selections.
NOTE: If blank sheets are not placed in the set of documents
to mark the location of the inserts, the DC440/432/430/426/
425/420 prints the image from the next page on to the insert.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-43
¾ After the last entry has been
made select [Save].
¾ Load the documents into the
document feeder and select
[Start].
NOTE: When 2-2 is selected the insert page range increases
from 1-50 to 1-99. This is because each 2-sided page counts
as 2 pages.
Booklet Creation
When this feature is selected the DC440/432/430/426/425/420
will print two pages, side by side, on both sides of each page.
To create a booklet fold the copies in half. The pages will
appear in the correct order.
HINT: If the number of document pages is a multiple of four,
the booklet will not contain blank pages. Otherwise, the extra
pages in the book will be blank.
NOTE: Booklet Creation is not available on the cabinet
configuration, or platen or simplex configurations.
Page 3-44
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Load the documents in the
Document Feeder long edge
feed and in order, with the
first page on top.
¾ Select [Booklet Creation] in
[Output Format].
¾ Select [On].
¾ Enter the quantity required
and select [Start].
NOTE: If the document is 8 1/2” x 11” and 11” x 17” paper is
selected as the output, the DC440/432/430/426/425/420
prints the booklet at 100%. If a paper size is not selected, the
machine defaults to the same size paper as the document and
reduces the images to fit.
Covers (DC440/432/430/425)
This feature enables paper or card covers to be added to a
copy job. Use the following steps to add covers to a job.
¾ Load the cover stock into the
required paper tray.
¾ The [Change Attributes]
window will be displayed.
Program the new paper stock
and select [Save].
¾ Select the features required.
¾ Select [Added Features]
and then [Output Format].
¾ Select [Covers].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-45
¾ Select either [Front Only] or
[Front and Back].
¾ Select [Blank Covers] or
[Printed Covers].
¾ Select the cover stock tray.
Select [Save].
¾ Load the documents and
select [Start].
NOTE: When using covers with inserts, the cover tray can be
the same tray as one of the inserts tray. The cover stock must
be the same size and orientation as the body of the document.
Covers options
Off the Covers feature is not available.
Front only the machine automatically adds a cover page to the front of the
set of documents.
Front & Back the machine automatically adds a cover page to the front and
back of the set of documents.
Once the Covers feature is selected the following two options
will be available:
Blank Covers the machine automatically adds a blank cover(s) to the
document. Blank sheets do not have to be added to the
documents.
Printed Covers the first (and last, if programmed) page of the set of documents
will be copied onto the cover stock. Blank sheets must be
added to the set of documents if only the front or the back cover
is to be printed.
Page 3-46
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
NOTE: 1
2, 2
1,Build Job, Uncollated, Transparencies,
Envelope Tray, Booklet Creation and Mixed Size Originals (if
APS (Auto Paper Select) is selected) cannot be used with the
Covers feature. If Annotation is selected with Printed Covers,
the annotation programmed will appear on the back cover.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-47
Job Assembly - Copy
Use the productivity features available in the Job Assembly tab
to program a job. For more information about the features
available refer to the following:
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
Build Job - page 3-48
Stored Jobs - page 3-50
¾If necessary select
[Copy].
¾Select [Added
Features]
¾Select [Job Assembly].
Build Job
Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for
each page. For example, if a set of documents consists of
some pages with text and some with photos, you can select
appropriate settings to be applied to individual pages or
sections of a complete job. By default, Build Job is set to Off.
HINT: To save time use the Build Job Screen instead of the
control panel to program each page.
Page 3-48
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Split the documents into
sections for individual
programming.
¾ Select [Build Job] and then
[On].
¾ Programme the job
requirements for the first
section of the job.
¾ Load only the first section in
to the document feeder or
place the document on the
glass.
¾ Select [Start].
NOTE: If more than a quantity of 1 has been selected, the
machine, depending on the features programmed, will copy 1
set of each section. The remaining sets will be copied at the
end of the job.
¾ When the first section has
finished scanning remove the
originals.
¾ From the [Build Job] screen
make selections for the next
section of the job and select
[Start].
¾ Repeat the steps above for
each selection of the job.
¾ After the last section has
been scanned, select [End
Build Job] to indicate that
the job has been completed.
The machine will complete
the quantity selected.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-49
NOTE: Inserts or Interrupt cannot be used with Build Job. The
Build Job 2 Sided selection will only copy Portrait documents
in Head to Head or Head to Toe orientation.
HINT: If a memory fault occurs, it is advisable to reduce the
number of originals from 50 to 40. The number of originals that
can be scanned depends on the complexity of the document
being scanned.
Stored Jobs
Up to 8 combinations of feature selections can be retained in
the machine memory as stored jobs. The machine stores only
the programming for the job, not the image. Each time a stored
job is used, the image must be scanned. The Stored Job touch
screen displays a list of all stored jobs.
Stored jobs are set to Off as the default. Contact the Key
Operator to change this feature to On.
To store a job
¾ Program the job features.
¾ Select [Added Features].
¾ Select [Job Assembly].
¾ Select [Stored Job].
Page 3-50
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ If required, use the scroll
arrows to select an empty job
in the Store Job list.
¾ Select [Store].
¾ Using the keypad on the
touch screen enter a name
for the job.
¾ If additional characters are
required select [More
Characters]. If an incorrect
entry is made, select the
button to backspace.
¾ Select [Save] to store the
name or [Cancel] to exit.
¾ The job will appear in the Job
List.
¾ Select [Close].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-51
To retrieve a stored job
¾ Select [Added Features]
and then [Job Assembly].
¾ Select [Stored Job].
¾ Select the required job in the
list and select [Retrieve].
A confirmation message will be
displayed in the message area.
¾ Select [Close].
Review the programming or
change any of the options
before selecting [Start]. Any
changes will not be saved on
completion of the job.
¾ Load the documents and
select [Start].
To delete a stored job
¾ Select [Added Features]
and then [Job Assembly].
¾ Select [Stored Job].
¾ Select the required job in the
list then select [Delete].
¾ In the pop-up window select
[Confirm] to delete or
[Close] to cancel.
¾ The job will be deleted from
the Job List.
Page 3-52
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Managing Copy Jobs
Job management can be carried out on each individual job
contained within the Print Queue. The Print Queue maintains
all pending and active jobs that are to be printed (Paused jobs
are considered active jobs). These include network print jobs,
Fax print jobs, report jobs and copy jobs.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Job Status] on
the control panel.
¾The Print Queue will be
displayed.
¾To display the
Completed Print Job
Queue select [Other
Queues] and
[Completed Print Jobs
Queue].
Print Queue
The Print Queue can hold approximately 500 jobs at one time.
Jobs are placed in the queue according to job priority and type.
When full the queue will not accept any more jobs. As space
becomes available new jobs will enter the queue.
Job # a number is assigned to identify each job .
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-53
Name the name of the job. For copy jobs, a default name ‘local’ is
used. For network print jobs and reports, the name of the file is
used. For faxes received, the name is typically the remote fax
ID number.
NOTE: Depending on the Third Party Server, different entries
might be displayed for Server Fax jobs.
Type the type of job. For example, Copy, Fax, Print or Proof Print.
NOTE: Server Fax print jobs will be reported as Fax Receive
Owner if this feature is enabled the column will show the name of the
person who submitted the job. For walk-up jobs, the default
name displayed is local. For Embedded Fax jobs, no owner
name is displayed. For Server Fax jobs, an owner name will be
displayed. For LAN Fax jobs it will be the person who submitted
the job.
Status information about the progress of a job, such as printing,
scanning, formatting.
Priority identifies the printing priority assigned to the job type.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Print Queue to manage
jobs. When a toolbar button is selected a pop-up window is
displayed. Select Confirm or Cancel to complete the requested
action.
Promote moves a job ahead of all other jobs that have the same status
and priority. Only jobs with a Pending or Held status can be
promoted. If more than one job with the same priority is
promoted, the jobs will be arranged in first-in, first-out order.
Jobs can be promoted at any time.
NOTE: It is recommended that jobs are only promoted in an
emergency.
Page 3-54
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Release removes the selected job from memory and completes it as
instructed. Jobs are held due to missing resources. For
example, embedded fax, print, sample set, delayed print and
secure print jobs.
Embedded Fax jobs can be labeled as Held due to incorrect
paper size (the paper size required is not available). Releasing
a fax job forces the machine to print the fax on any available
paper, which might require a reduction or other modification. It
is held in memory until the problem is resolved.
A password is required to release a Secure Print job. Each user
sets his or her password(s) at the network user application
driver. Different passwords for each job, or one password for
all jobs can be set. Other jobs in the queue bypass this job and
are completed.
After a problem has been resolved, or when the held job is
ready to print, select the job and select Release.
Delete deletes the selected job from the Print Queue. After the job is
deleted, all of the resources allocated to that job are also
released. In an open system (no access control), any job can
be deleted by any user. If an active job is deleted, it stops
printing immediately and is placed in the Completed Print Jobs
Queue, where it is listed as Canceled by User. If a pending job
is deleted, it is removed from the Print Queue and is placed in
the Completed Print Jobs Queue, where it is listed as a
canceled job.
NOTE: Only the owner of a job should delete the job.
Details displays additional programming information about the jobs in
the Print Queue. For held jobs, the Details screen includes
information about how to release the job.
Other Queues displays the other job queues available.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 3-55
Completed Print Jobs Queue
Maintains completed print jobs including Server Fax (received)
jobs. Jobs are considered complete when they are
successfully printed, or terminated due to user request or a
fault. The queue contains the last 50 completed print jobs. Jobs
are maintained on a first-in, first-out basis and organized in
order of completion.
Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue.
Item the number in sequence for the job.
Name the name of the document or the remote terminal.
Type the type of job, for example Copy.
Owner the creator of the job. For print jobs, this is the person who
submitted the job.
Status information about the progress of the completed job. This
includes completed jobs, faulted jobs, jobs canceled by users
and jobs canceled by the system.
Time completed the time and date when the job entered the queue.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Completed Print Jobs
Queue to manage jobs.
Details displays additional information about the jobs in the queue.
Other Queues displays the other job queues available.
Page 3-56
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
4 Fax
Sending and receiving a facsimile (fax) is an optional feature
on the Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420.
Please refer to the following for more information.
Embedded Fax Walk up fax on the Document Centre provided by a built-in
(embedded) fax device within the machine. Users must select
the Fax tab to access the Embedded Fax features.
Server Fax (DC440/432/430/ Walk up fax available on a Document Centre linked to a
forwards it. Users must select the Fax tab to access the Server
Fax features.
NOTE: Both Embedded Fax and Server Fax can be installed
BUT only one can be enabled at any one time
NOTE: Restricted access can be applied to the Server Fax
features. Please refer to “Authentication Mode - Server Fax”
on page 4-58 or contact the System Administrator for further
information.
software.
NOTE: For DC440/432/430/425 LAN Fax and Server Fax
cannot be installed at the same time.
For more information please refer to:
Embedded Fax - page 4-2
Server Fax (440/432/430/425) - page 4-44
LAN Fax - page 4-62
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-1
Embedded Fax Procedure
Please refer to the following steps on how to send a ‘quick’ fax
from the Document Centre using the standard features
available within Embedded Fax.
Quick Pathway
¾Load documents.
¾Press [Features].
¾If necessary select [All
Services].
¾Select [Fax].
¾Select the features
required.
Sending a Fax using Embedded Fax
1. Select Features
¾ If necessary select
[Features] to display the
feature modes.
¾ Select [Clear All] once to
cancel any previous screen
programming selections.
Selecting [Clear All] twice
clears all the programming
pathways and returns the
machine to its default status.
Features Button
Clear All
Page 4-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
3. Dial the number
¾ Using the numeric keypad,
enter the fax number.
If a character is normally dialed
before the telephone number,
for example 9 for an outside
line, a pause might need to be
entered after this character -
select [Dial Pause] on the
control panel before continuing
to enter the fax number.
NOTE: Dial Pause is displayed
as a dash. When using manual
dialling, the Dial Pause
character is not required;
instead wait for the outside line
dial tone before proceeding.
Dial Pause button
4. Select Start
¾ Select [Start].
The Fax Job Monitor pop-up
window will be displayed. This
shows information about the fax
job.
The Document Centre scans
the images and places them in
its memory.
Page 4-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
The fax job enters the fax
queue.
¾ Remove the documents.
If enabled, the machine will print
a transmission report once the
fax has been sent.
For more information about the
job, select [Job Status].
NOTE: Refer to “Managing Fax
Jobs” on page 4-63 for more
detailed information.
To help identify the status when sending an embedded fax, the
following symbols will appear in the right hand corner of the
touch screen.
Fax Status
Document in Memory the machine contains one or more copy or fax jobs in memory.
Fax Error a communication error has occurred. Select Job Status and
check the Fax Queue for details. The symbol disappears when
any key on the control panel or any area on the touch screen
is selected.
Fax on Line the machine has made a connection to the telephone line.
There may be two telephone lines available on the DC440/432/
430/425, the number (1 or 2) displayed next to this symbol
indicates the telephone line being used.
If there is a problem transmitting the fax, it will be recorded in
the machine’s Activity Report, available in the Reports &
Setups tab and in the Completed Fax Jobs List in Job Status.
A status of Completed in the Fax Queue means the fax has
been received, but it does not mean it has been printed.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-5
The standard memory in the fax machine is 10 megabytes.
When memory fills up, the DC440/432/430/426/425/420
switches to Immediate Send Mode. In this case, the image
from each page is immediately transmitted and then deleted to
make room for the next page.
NOTE: If Immediate Send Mode is in use and the fax
documents exceed the available memory on the transmitting
machine, a message will be displayed “delete the job or select
Resume to send documents already scanned”. If resume is
selected another message will appear on completion advising
the job be resent when more memory is available. With either
option it is recommended that the job be resent when more
memory is available. To obtain more memory on the machine,
reduce the resolution or send the job in text mode.
The Fax Transmission report contains information about the
job and a reduced image of the first page in the set of
documents. In Immediate Send Mode, the confirmation page
contains the information and page numbers as usual, but it
does not contain the reduced image of the first page.
NOTE: If an error is detected, a message is displayed on the
touch screen. Correct the error and proceed.
Page 4-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Standard Features - Embedded Fax
The first Fax screen offers access to the features required to
send a fax. For more information about the features available
refer to the following:
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
Resolution - page 4-7
Original Type - page 4-8
Sides Scanned - page 4-9
Dialing - page 4-10
the control panel.
¾If necessary select
[Fax].
¾Select the features
available on the first
Fax screen.
NOTE: For DC440/432/430/425 Embedded Fax and Server
Fax can both be installed on the Document Centre but only
one option can be enabled at one time.
Resolution
The resolution affects the appearance of the fax at the
receiving fax terminal. A higher resolution yields better quality
for photos. A lower resolution reduces communication time.
Standard (200 x 100 dpi) recommended for text documents. It requires less
communication time, but does not produce the best image
quality for graphics and photos.
Fine (200 x 200 dpi) recommended for line art. It produces output with a resolution
between super fine and standard. This is the default resolution
and the best choice in most cases.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-7
Super Fine (400 x 400 dpi) recommended for photos and halftones, or images that have
gray tones. It requires more communication time, but produces
the best image quality.
Original Type
Use this feature to identify the type of document being scanned
for transmission.
Text use this setting for text, line art and documents with large solid
areas. It produces sharp text images, but might reduce the
quality of halftone or photographic images. This is the factory
default setting.
Auto senses the image and automatically selects the best text or
photo option. Use this setting for combinations of text and
photos, or text and graphics.
Photo use this setting for photographs and images that have a
continuous tone. However, it might reduce the sharpness of
the text.
Page 4-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Sides Scanned
This is used to specify whether the documents are single-sided
or double-sided and in some instances, the orientation is also
required.
¾ Select [Sides Scanned] to
access the options available.
The following options are available:
1 Sided each document is single-sided.
2 Sided each document is double-sided.
1, 2,....2, 2 the first page of the set of documents is single-sided and the
rest of the document is double-sided.
If the document is double-sided, specify the type of document.
- Portrait or Landscape
- Head to Head or Head to Toe
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-9
Dialing
Refer to the following pages for information about the Dialing
options.
Next Destination
Use this feature to send a fax to more than one location.
Speed dial numbers, full numbers, group numbers, or a
mixture, up to a maximum of 50 entries and 249 destinations
(200 via speed dial numbers and 49 via full dial numbers) can
be entered.
¾ Enter the first fax number
(using the keypad, speed dial
etc)
¾ Select [Next Destination] -
the touch screen displays the
Dial Directory
¾ Enter the next fax number. A
maximum of 50 numbers can
be entered using Next
Destination.
Page 4-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Next Destination].
The number appears in the
list.
¾ Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all
the numbers have been
entered.
¾ Select [Save].
NOTE: If entering more than 50 numbers, the message Input
limit exceeded is displayed and the additional numbers are
ignored.
HINT: To cancel the job and all selected destinations, select
Stop.
Dialing Characters
Dialing characters are special characters that are used for
entering fax numbers. Some characters are used only when
auto dialing, such as:, !, /, - and =. Dialing characters are
entered as part of the fax number. As Dial Pause [-] is so
commonly used, it is available as a button on the control panel
and also in the list of Dialing Characters.
¾ Select the character required.
¾ Select [Add].
¾ Repeat the above steps for
each character.
¾ Select [Enter] to exit.
Depending on the setup of the telephone and communication
lines, some or all of the following characters will need to be
used.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-11
Dial pause [-] to pause between numbers. This pause gives the DC440/432/
430/426/425/420 time to switch from an inside line to an
outside line during automatic dialing. This is similar to using a
telephone, except dial pause is automatically entered when 9
(or another designated number) is dialed to get an outside line.
On the Document Centre, Dial Pause is displayed as a dash;
for example, 9-1234567. For additional pause time, add
multiple pauses. However, do not add pauses unless a delay
is expected. If using charge code numbers, enter a pause after
the fax number, but before the charge code numbers, to
ensure that the telephone line is ready to accept the numbers.
Mask data [/] to protect confidential information. Select the forward slash key
(/) before entering confidential numbers. After entering the last
confidential number, select the slash key (/) again to turn off
Mask Data. The characters or numbers entered between the
slash (/) characters are displayed as asterisks (*). Select
[Enter] after each entry. The placement of the masked data
varies depending on the data being masked.
Password check switch [S] for remote terminal identification. This character verifies that
the correct number has been dialed, which is very important if
sending a confidential document. A password is required
before transmission to a remote machine. For example,
1234567S4567 (where as 1234567 is the telephone number
and 4567 after the S is the password) instructs the machine to
check for validity, which is also known as Secure Send. The
machine does not dial any number after the S, which is the ID
number.
Start fax mailbox signalling [!] to pause regular fax dialing and start Dual Tone Multi-
Frequency (DTMF) procedures for the fax mailbox.
Wait for mailbox to wait for confirmation that the fax has changed from normal
confirmation[$] fax signalling to mailbox signalling.
Pulse-to-tone switch [:] to switch from pulse dialing to DTMF (tone or touch-tone)
dialing. After switching from pulse to tone, you cannot switch
back to the original mode during the fax operation. For
example, use pulse mode to make the connection and tone
Page 4-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
mode to access a mailbox. This is similar to a telephone
response system. Dial the number and wait for instructions.
After the call is answered and the greeting is heard, users are
prompted to select 1 (or some other designated character) if
you are calling from a touch-tone phone. When the designated
character is selected, the system switches from pulse to tone.
Wait for network tone to suspend dialing until an expected network tone is detected.
detection [=] Or it can be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an
outside line or other services.
Local ID [+] character check required as part of some international telephone numbers (in
[+] place of 00).
Local ID [space] character to improve readability. For example, adding spaces to a
check [ ] telephone number as 1 234 5678 instead of 12345678.
Telephone
Manual, or On-hook, dialing is like using a telephone, except a
handset is not available. When using the Telephone option a
dial tone will be heard if the Line Monitor has been enabled by
the Key Operator.
If the two telephone lines are available on the DC440/432/430/
425 a Telephone option window will be displayed offering the
following features:
Auto Select with this option the system will automatically select an
available telephone line. Line 1 is checked first, if this is not
available, Line 2 is used.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-13
Line 1 select this option if Line 1 is required.
Line 2 select this option if Line 2 is required.
NOTE: Only 1 telephone line is available on the DC426/420.
After selecting one of the above options, or if only one
telephone line is available, select Send or Receive to tell the
machine the type of job. Enter the phone number and select
Start.
NOTE: When both fax lines are installed but one is set to
receive only, port (line) designation is not available. The
selection of <1> or <2> will not be available in the dialing
characters list.
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 does not have a handset
connected. It is On-hook as indicated on the touch screen. If an
external telephone is connected, the machine will indicate Off-
hook when the handset is lifted from the telephone. If the
recipient of the fax does not have a dedicated telephone line,
use manual dialing.
Use the following options to dial a fax number manually:
Send used to send a fax.
Mask Data used to enter the fax number that contains confidential
numbers, for example a credit card number.
Receive to receive a fax.
Pulse-to-Tone to switch between pulse and touch-tone dialing.
Valid pulse mode, dialing characters are numbers 1 through 9
and 0. Valid tone or Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) mode
characters are numbers 1 through 9, 0, * and #.
Dialing characters are different from the alphabet characters
on the dialing keypad. They are available only through a
special character keypad. Select the special character keypad
from the touch screen.
Page 4-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Keypad
The keypad corresponds to the control panel telephone
keypad buttons.
Speed Dial
Entering a telephone number into the dial directory
automatically establishes it as a speed dial number, a short-cut
version for quick dialing. Instead of entering the entire number,
simply select Speed Dial and enter the three-digit speed dial
number. For information about setting up the Dial Directory
refer to “Dial Directory” on page 4-16.
Select this
button
Enter this
data
Results
Speed Dial
Speed Dial
123
To dial the fax number assigned
to speed dial number 123.
12*
To dial a continuous block of
numbers. For example, if the
members of the Sales
Department are assigned
numbers beginning with 12, the *
acts as a wildcard and selects
numbers 0–9. The fax is sent to
speed dial numbers
120–129.
Speed Dial
Speed Dial
***
To dial all speed dial numbers.
The * acts as a wildcard and
selects all numbers.
#01
To dial group number 01.
HINT: To save time print the Dial Directory and display it near
the machine.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-15
Dial Directory
The Dial Directory contains frequently used fax numbers. It
also contains Speed Dial and Group Dial numbers. Names and
numbers can be added to the Dial Directory by using Dial
Directory Setup on the Reports & Setups tab. Refer to “Dial
Directory Setup” on page 4-37 for more information.
When a name is selected from the list, the DC440/432/430/
426/425/420 automatically enters the corresponding number
or group of numbers. Speed Dial numbers are at the beginning
of the list and Group Dial numbers are at the end.
Use the Speed Dial button to quickly jump to a location in the
Dial Directory. For example, to jump from number 5 to 150,
select Speed Dial and enter 150. Speed Dial can be accessed
from any of the fax screens. Use the scroll buttons to move
through the speed dial numbers and groups in the Dial
Directory.
The Current Dial List displays the list of telephone numbers
that the fax will be sent to.
To add numbers to the Current
Dial List:
¾ Select the number from the
Dial Directory list and select
[Next Destination].
¾ Select the next number to be
added to the list and select
[Next Destination].
¾ Repeat the above steps until
all of the numbers added are
displayed in the Current Dial
List. A maximum of 50
numbers can be added.
Page 4-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
To delete numbers from the Current Dial List, select Delete.
(The machine automatically selects the last number). Numbers
cannot be deleted out of order; always start with the last
number on the list.
Each speed dial fax number can have a specific setup and
cover letter. More than one number can be selected if sending
a fax to more than one recipient. The Dial Directory can store
a maximum of 200 numbers. Each speed dial telephone
number can contain a maximum of 39 characters (digits,
spaces, and pauses).
In addition, a telephone number from the dialing keypad can
also be entered. Use this is an alternative to selecting a speed
dial number from the dial directory. Up to 120 digits or special
characters can be entered using this method.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-17
More Features - Embedded Fax
When the More Features tab is selected additional tabs are
displayed. For more information please refer to:
Quick Pathway
Advanced Features - page 4-24
¾Select [Features]
button on the control
panel.
Reports and Setups - page 4-34
NOTE: If Fax is the default screen this tab will be called
Added Features. On selection it will change to More Features.
¾If necessary select
[Fax].
¾Select [More
Features].
information about the features available refer to the following:
Cover Letter - page 4-19
Transmission Report - page 4-20
Lighter/Darker - page 4-20
Communications Mode (DC440/432/430/425) / Forced 4800
Mode (DC426/420) - page 4-21
Delayed Start - page 4-22
Send Priority (DC440/432/430/425) - page 4-23
Page 4-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Cover Letter (Cover Page)
Use this feature to automatically generate a Cover Letter for an
out-going fax.
¾ Select [More Features] and
then [Cover Letter].
¾ Select [On]. The [Comment
List] will be displayed.
¾ Select [To Comment] and
select the recipients name
from the list. The name
appears under To Comment.
¾ Select [From Comment] and
then the senders name from
the list. The name appears
under the From Comment.
¾ Select [Save].
The Cover Letter contains the following information.
NOTE: Except for the To and From comments, the following
are automatically inserted. Refer to “Comment Setup” on page
4-42 for information about setting up a comment.
- A Fax cover letter title.
- The name or telephone number of the remote terminal. (If
the fax number has been entered manually instead of
using the Dial Directory, the first line of the To comment is
blank.)
- The To comment (recipient’s name).
- The local name.
- The From comment (sender’s name).
- The telephone number for the local, or sending, terminal.
- The number of pages, not including the cover page.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-19
- The date (month, day and year) and time (hours and
minutes).
Transmission Report
When selected, this feature prints a confirmation of the
transmission for each fax sent from the machine. The
transmission report contains details about the fax and a
reduced copy of the image from the first page of the fax.
When sending a fax to multiple recipients (broadcast), one
transmission report will be printed listing all of the recipients.
¾ Load the document.
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Transmission
Report].
¾ Select [On].
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Start].
Lighter/Darker
Adjusts the image quality of the document being scanned for
fax transmissions.
¾ Load the document.
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Lighter/Darker].
¾ Use the scroll bars to
increase or decrease the
image adjustment.
¾ Select [Save] and select
[Start].
Page 4-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Communication Mode (DC440/432/430/425)
On the DC440/432/430/425 this feature allows selection of the
communication mode used for transmission to a remote fax
machine.
NOTE: On the DC426/420 the Forced 4800 bps feature is the
only available option.
¾ Load the document.
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Communications
Mode].
¾ Select the required option.
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Start].
The following options are available:
Super G3 determines the communication mode to be used based on the
maximum capabilities of the remote fax machine. This mode
minimizes data transmission errors by using Error Correction
Mode (ECM). Initial communication speed will be 33,600 Bits
Per Second (bps).
G3 selects the communication mode based on the maximum
capabilities of the remote fax machine. Initial communication
speed will be 14,400 bps. ECM is also used with this option.
Forced 4800 bps used in areas of low-quality communication, or when
experiencing telephone noise, or when fax communications
are susceptible to errors. To minimize errors, set the DC440/
432/430/426/425/420 to run at a communication mode of 4800.
This mode is slower, but it is less susceptible to errors.
In some regional areas, the use of the Communication Mode/
Forced 4800 bps feature is restricted.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-21
Delayed Start
Delayed Start is mainly used to transmit faxes during off-peak
hours when telephone charges are lower or when sending to
another country/time zone.
Use Delayed Start, to transmit a document to a single
destination, or use a broadcast send or polling operation. Up to
100 delayed send jobs can be programmed at one time,
depending on the size of the documents and the available
memory. Only one delayed poll can be saved at a time. Use the
Fax Job Monitor feature to check the available memory.
¾ Load the document.
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Delayed Start].
¾ Select [ON] - the Delayed
Start screen will be displayed.
¾ Use the up/down scroll
arrows to indicate the hour
and minutes when you would
like the fax to be transmitted.
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Start].
NOTE: If a power outage occurs, all pending delay start jobs
will be queued to start immediately once power is restored.
Page 4-22
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Send Priority (DC440/432/430/425)
Use this feature to choose either a high or normal priority for a
fax job. If Normal is selected the job will not be sent until all the
high priority jobs have been sent.
NOTE: Send Priority can be used with Delayed Start.
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Send Priority].
¾ Select either [Normal] or
[High].
¾ Select [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-23
Advanced Features - Embedded Fax
features that can be applied when sending a fax. For more
information about the features available refer to the following:
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
Build Job - page 4-25
Poll Remote Fax - page 4-26
Store for Polling - page 4-27
Fax Mailbox - page 4-30
¾If necessary select
[Fax].
¾Select [More
Features].
Original Size (DC440/432/430/425)/Mixed Size Originals
(DC426/420) - page 4-33
¾Select [Advanced
Features].
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Advanced Features]
the options available will be
displayed.
Page 4-24
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Build Job
Use Build Job when both the Document Feeder and the
Document Glass are required within the same job, or if different
programming selections are required for pages or sections of
the job.
¾ Load the first section of the
document set.
¾ Select the features for the
first part of the job.
¾ Select [Build Job] and then
[On].
¾ Select [Start] - the
documents will be scanned.
The [Build Job] feature
selection screen will appear on
the touch screen.
¾ Make any programming
changes for the next section.
¾ Load the documents and
select [Start].
Repeat the above steps until all
the sections of the document set
have been scanned in.
¾ Select [End Build Job] when
the last section of the job has
been scanned in. The job will
be faxed.
If the machine reaches a low
memory level during a build job
operation, the job will be
cancelled.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-25
NOTE: Build Job cannot be used with Poll Remote Fax, or if
the Telephone button has been selected. Also, Interrupt, Clear
All, Access, Features, Job Status and Machine Status will not
be available when Build Job is in use.
Poll Remote Fax
Polling means retrieving a document from a remote machine.
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 offers several types of
polling. Each method prompts specific selections. If the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 does not connect with the
remote machine when polling, it redials the number. However,
if it does connect and then the transmission fails, it does not
redial the number. If this happens start the job again. After the
telephone connection is made, the polled fax job appears in the
Fax Job Queue in Job Status.
Polling retrieving a document from a remote fax machine.
Delayed polling retrieving a document at a programmed time. Only one
delayed polling job is allowed at one time.
DTMF Mailbox Polling retrieving a document from a mailbox in a remote machine. If
the remote fax is a DC440/432/430/426/425/420, documents
can be stored in a mailbox for polling.
¾ Select [Poll Remote Fax].
¾ Select [On] and [Save].
¾ On the first Fax screen enter
the number of the remote fax
machine.
¾ Select [Start].
Page 4-26
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Store for Polling
This feature stores documents in the DC440/432/430/426/425/
420 memory where they can be retrieved by a remote fax
machine. Each time a store for polling job is started, the new
documents are added to any documents already stored. There
are two methods available:
Free polling the document is immediately sent when polled. If documents
are stored for secure polling and Store for free polling is
selected, the polling passwords stored will be deleted. A
confirmation pop-up window will be displayed.
Secure polling a password is required to retrieve the fax. The document is
sent if the machine recognizes the password used by the
remote user. The Document Centre must identify the remote
terminal ID number as one of the passwords previously
registered. The machine checks the entire password and
sends the document stored for polling if a match is successful.
NOTE: The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 can hold 10
passwords of up to 20 numeric characters each.
Free Polling:
¾ Load the Document.
¾ Enter the fax number for the
remote machine.
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Advanced
Features].
¾ Select [Store for Polling].
¾ Select [Free Polling] then
[Close].
¾ Select [Start].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-27
Secure Polling:
¾ Load the document.
¾ Enter the fax number for the
remote machine.
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Advanced
Features].
¾ Select [Store for Polling].
¾ Select [Polling Passwords]
and select the password from
the list and select [Close].
¾ Select [Start].
NOTE: On the DC426/420 the
Document Size window will be
displayed. Select the document
size and then Start to complete
the job.
NOTE: If the DC440/432/430/426/425/420’s memory is full
when trying to store a document for secure polling, cancel the
operation and try again later when more memory is available.
Page 4-28
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Polling Password Button
If there are no passwords in the list, use the following steps to
create a password:
¾ Select [Polling Password].
¾ If necessary, use the up/
down scroll arrows to select a
blank location in the list.
¾ Use the pop-up keypad to
enter the fax ID number (fax
telephone number) of the
remote machine that will be
retrieving the document.
¾ Select [Add].
Delete documents
This option is used to delete all of the electronic fax documents
stored for polling. Before deleting documents, a confirmation
message will appear on the touch screen.
Print documents
Used to print the electronic documents stored for polling. If the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 is configured by the Key
Operator to delete the stored documents after they are printed,
a confirmation message will appear confirming the request.
HINT: Configuring the machine to delete the stored
documents after printing saves memory.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-29
Fax Mailbox
The Key Operator establishes mailboxes and passwords for
the DC440/432/430/426/425/420. If an electronic mailbox is
available, electronic fax documents can be stored, retrieved
and deleted in the mailbox.
NOTE: There is no password restriction for storing documents
in a mailbox.
Store to Mailbox
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Advanced
Features].
¾ Select [Fax Mailbox].
¾ Select [Store to Mailbox].
¾ Using the keypad on the
control panel enter the
mailbox number.
¾ Load the documents.
¾ Select [Start].
NOTE: On the DC440/432/430/425 mailbox numbers are 3
digits from 001-200. On the DC426/420 mailbox numbers are
2 digits from 01-30.
Page 4-30
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Print from Mailbox
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Advanced
Features].
¾ Select [Fax Mailbox].
¾ Select [Print from Mailbox].
¾ Using the keypad on the
control panel enter the
mailbox number.
¾ Using the keypad on the
control panel enter the four-
digit mailbox password
(0000-9999). The password
will be displayed as ****.
¾ Select [Enter].
After the document is printed, it
is deleted.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-31
Delete Mailbox Contents
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Advanced
Features].
¾ Select [Fax Mailbox].
¾ Select [Delete Mailbox
Contents].
¾ Using the keypad on the
control panel enter the
mailbox number.
¾ Using the keypad on the
control panel enter the four-
digit mailbox password
(0000-9999). The password
will be displayed as ****).
¾ Select [Enter].
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 confirms deletion after the
mailbox number and password have been entered.
Page 4-32
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Original Size (DC440/432/430/425)/Mixed Size Originals (DC426/
420)
The Document Centre can automatically sense mixed size
originals. Use this feature to fax a set of mixed size documents
using the Document Feeder.
¾ Load the documents face up
in to the document feeder.
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Advanced
Features].
¾ On the DC440/432/430/425
select [Original Size]. On the
DC426/420 select [Mixed
Size].
¾ On the DC440/432/430/425
select [Save]. On the DC426/
420 select [On] and then
[Save].
¾ Select [Start].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-33
Reports & Setups - Embedded Fax
Use the Reports and Setups tab to print various reports, set up
directories, store comments and other specifications. For more
information about the features available refer to the following:
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
Fax Reports - page 4-35
Answer Mode - page 4-36
¾If necessary select the
[Fax].
Dial Directory Setup - page 4-37
Comment Setup - page 4-42
¾Select [More Features]
¾Select [Reports &
Transmit Header Print (DC440/432/430/425) - page 4-43
Setups].
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Reports and
Setups].
Page 4-34
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Fax Reports
The following reports are available on the machine:
Fax Report Options
Activity Report contains information about the last 50 communications
completed on the machine and can either manually or
automatically print a report of the telephone line activity for both
receiving and transmitting jobs. This report does not count the
cover page as a transmitted page, but it does count the receipt
of a cover page (if created by the machine) as a received page.
Pending Jobs Report contains information about the jobs still in memory. In addition,
this report gives a percentage of available memory.
Options Report (DC426/420) provides the current settings for the machine and the
programmed comments, message stamp comments, stored
jobs and firmware version.
Dial Directory Report provides information about the Dial Directory numbers. Print a
(Complete Report) complete report, or specific sections of the report (the first 50
numbers, 51–100, 101–150, 151–200, or Dial Groups).
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-35
Answer Mode
There are two answering (or receiving) modes: Auto and
Manual.
¾ Select [Answer Mode].
¾ Select the option required.
Auto Answer the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 automatically answers the
telephone. The Key Operator can set the Auto Answer delay
between 0 and 15 seconds. This depends on the way the
machine is used. The delay gives recipients an opportunity to
answer the telephone. After the programmed time delay (or
immediately if it is set to 0), the machine automatically
answers.
Manual Answer the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 will not automatically
answer. On answering the telephone and if a fax tone is heard,
select Receive and Start to switch from the telephone to fax.
Page 4-36
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Dial Directory Setup
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 enables programming of
numbers for individuals and groups. Begin by programming
individual numbers. Then, combine numbers that are to be
included in a group.
Individual
Use this feature to enter numbers in to the Dial Directory.
¾ Select [More Features].
¾ Select [Reports & Setups].
¾ Select [Dial Directory
Setup].
¾ Select [Individual].
¾ Select a blank location in
[Dial Directory].
¾ Select [Next].
¾ Using the keypad on the
control panel enter the fax
telephone number for the
individual.
¾ Select [Next].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-37
¾ Use the soft keypad to enter
the name of the recipient (up
to 18 characters). If an
incorrect entry is made,
select the
button to
backspace.
¾ Select [Next].
¾ Select the desired default
settings for the faxes to be
sent to this recipient
Resolution, Communication
Mode and Maximum Storage
Width.
¾ Select [Next].
Page 4-38
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ The [Cover Letter] screen
will appear.
¾ Select either [On] or [Off]. If
[Off] is selected, Select
[Next].
¾ If [On] is selected select the
‘To’ Comment.
¾ Select a comment from the
Comment List.
¾ Select the ‘From’ Comment’.
¾ Select a comment from the
[Comment List].
¾ Select [Next] - the Delayed
Start options screen will be
displayed.
¾ Select [Save] OR select [On]
and use the scroll arrows to
indicate the hour and minutes
when the fax is to be
transmitted.
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Close].
The Individual listing and all
selections made for that listing
will now be displayed in the Dial
Directory.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-39
Maximum Store Width determines the size of the image stored in memory. An 11” x
17” document can be stored as an 8 1/2” x 11” document to
save memory. This also depends on the ability of the recipient
to receive large documents. If the remote fax machine cannot
receive documents larger than 8 1/2” x 11”, save it as an 8 1/2”
x 11” document. Saving it as an 11” x 17” document uses
additional memory needlessly. In this case, the document will
be stored as an 8 1/2” x 11” document, based on the
requirements of the remote fax machine.
Deleting a number from the Dial Directory
¾ Select the number to be deleted.
¾ Select [Delete].
NOTE: Numbers cannot be deleted out of order. Always start
from at the bottom of the list.
Group
This feature enables the combination of specific individual
names and numbers into a Group. In order to be entered as a
member in a Group, the person must first be programmed as
an individual in the Dial Directory. When sending a fax to a
group, just use one group number and the machine scans the
document once. However, each individual in the group
receives the document.
Page 4-40
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Following the same steps
used to enter a name in the
Individual Directory, refer to
“Dial Directory Setup” on
page 4-37, enter a group
name in the Group Directory
¾ Choose a group number,
name the group and save.
¾ From the Dial Directory select
the individual names and
numbers that are to be
included in the group.
¾ After each name and number,
select Add to add it to the
group.
¾ To delete a group, select the
group number and select
[Delete].
¾ The machine automatically
selects the last number.
Numbers cannot be deleted
out of order, always start with
the last number on the list.
NOTE: Up to 10 groups can be programmed and stored. Each
group can contain a maximum of 20 destinations.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-41
To send a Group Fax
¾ Select [Dial Directory].
¾ Use the up and down keys to
locate the directory number
required. Groups will be at
the bottom of the list.
¾ Enter #01 to go to the top of
the list).
¾ Select the required number -
details appear in the display
window.
¾ Select [Next] to add the
selection to the current dial
list.
¾ To enter additional locations,
repeat steps 5 and 6.
Comment Setup
Comments are used in the To and From lines on a cover page.
Refer to “Cover Letter (Cover Page)” on page 4-19 on how to
add a comment. The DC440/432/430/425 can store up to 50
comments in the Comments List. The DC426/420 can store up
to 34 comments.
¾ Select [Comment Setup] in
Reports & Setups.
¾ Select an empty line in the
Comment List to enter the
name(s) you want to
program.
Page 4-42
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Next ] (DC440/432/
430/425) or [Enter] (DC426/
420 ) to display the keypad. If
an incorrect entry is made,
select the
button to
backspace.
¾ Enter the comment(s).
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Save] again.
Transmit Header Print
The Document Centre will automatically print the following
information on the top of each page of an outgoing fax:
- Machine ID number
- Company logo
- Destination name
- Date, Time, and Page number
Use the following steps to switch this feature on.
¾ Select [Transmit Header
Print] feature in Reports &
Setups.
¾ Select [On] and then [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-43
Server Fax Procedure 440/432/430/425
Server Fax does not have any telephony capabilities,
Quick Pathway
documents are scanned and filed to a defined location where
a Third Party Fax Server retrieves the document and forwards
it to its final destination. Server Fax is based on the Network
Scanning feature, please refer to “Network Scanning” on page
6-1 for more information.
¾Load documents.
¾Press [Features].
¾If necessary select [All
Services].
NOTE: The System Administrator can restrict user access to
Server Fax. Please refer to “Authentication Mode - Server
Fax” on page 4-58 for more information or contact the System
Administrator.
¾Select [Fax].
Please refer to the following steps on how to send a ‘quick’ fax
from the Document Centre using the standard features
available within Server Fax.
NOTE: LAN Fax and Server Fax cannot be installed at the
same time.
Page 4-44
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Sending a Fax using Server Fax
1. Select Features
¾ If necessary select
[Features] to display the
feature modes.
¾ Select [Clear All] once to
cancel any previous screen
programming selections.
Selecting [Clear All] twice
clears all the programming
pathways and returns the
machine to its default status.
Features Button
Clear All
¾ If necessary select [All
Services].
¾ Select [Fax].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-45
3. Dial the number
¾ Using the numeric keypad,
enter the fax number.
4. Select Start
¾ Select [Start].
The fax job enters the fax
queue.
¾ Remove the documents.
If enabled by the System Administrator, a Confirmation Report
will be printed at the machine to confirm that the fax has been
scanned and filed successfully or if not, the report will also
display any errors that may have occurred.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-47
Standard Features - Server Fax
The first Fax screen offers access to the features required to
send a fax. For more information about the features available
refer to the following:
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
Resolution - page 4-48
Original Type - page 4-49
Sides Scanned - page 4-50
Dialing - page 4-51
the control panel.
¾If necessary select [All
Services].
¾Select [Fax].
¾Select the features
available on the first
Fax screen.
Resolution
The resolution affects the appearance of the fax at the
receiving fax terminal. A higher resolution yields better quality
for photos. A lower resolution reduces communication time.
Standard (200 x 100 dpi) recommended for text documents. It requires less
communication time, but does not produce the best image
quality for graphics and photos.
Fine (200 x 200 dpi) this is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases.
Page 4-48
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Original Type
Use this feature to identify the type of document being
scanned.
Text use this setting for text, line art and documents with large solid
areas. It produces sharp text images, but might reduce the
quality of halftone or photographic images. This is the default
setting.
Auto use this setting for combinations of text and photos, or text and
graphics.
Photo use this setting for photographs and images that have a
continuous tone. However, it might reduce the sharpness of
the text.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-49
Sides Scanned
This is used to specify whether the documents are single-sided
or double-sided. For double-sided documents the image
orientation can also be programmed.
¾ Select [Sides Scanned] to
access the options available.
The following options are available:
1 Sided each document is single-sided.
2 Sided each document is double-sided.
2 Sided 2nd side rotated each document is double-sided with each second side rotated
by 180º.
1, 2,....2, 2 the first page of the set of documents is single-sided and the
rest of the document is double-sided.
Page 4-50
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Dialing
Four dialling options are available within the Server Fax
screen.
Send List/Phonebook
The Send List and Phonebook features enable users to create
a list of fax recipient numbers for a current fax job, or
alternatively store regularly used numbers on the machine.
Send List and Phonebook features share the same touch
screen. Whichever feature is selected, the same touch screen
will be displayed. Fax numbers can be added to both areas.
NOTE: When moving through the fax default screen the fax
number entered will remain displayed.
A description of each option follows:
Send List this is a list of numbers to which the fax will be sent. Entries
displayed will be for the current fax job. Once the job has been
faxed the entries will be automatically deleted from the list. The
list can contain upto 50 entries.
NOTE: Once an entry is added to the Send List an asterisk
will appear in the Send List button on the main Server Fax
screen.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-51
Phonebook this is a list of saved fax numbers. Once added, Phonebook
entries can only be edited by selecting [Add to Phonebook] or
[Delete].
Refer to the following steps for more information:
¾ Select [Phonebook] or
[Send List].
¾ Enter a fax number using the
numeric keypad OR select
the number from either list.
¾ If required, select Dialing
Chars] and add the
characters to be stored with
the fax number.
¾ Select [Add to Phonebook]
to store the number for future
use OR [Add to Send List]
to build the list of numbers for
the current fax job.
HINT: Selecting Start will
automatically add the fax
number to the Send List.
¾ Select [Save] to exit or
[Cancel] to remove the
entries in the Send List.
Page 4-52
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
NOTE: Save and Cancel only apply to fax numbers entered in
the Send List. Phonebook entries are automatically saved
when added.
Dialing Characters
Dialing characters are special characters that are used for
entering fax numbers. Dialing characters are entered as part of
the fax number, this feature can be selected from the Server
Fax main screen or from the Send List / Phonebook feature.
¾ Select the character required.
¾ Select [Add].
¾ Repeat the above steps for
each character.
¾ Select [Enter] to exit.
Refer to the following for more information:
NOTE: Please check with the Third Party Vendor as to
whether the following options are supported.
Dial pause [,] to pause between numbers. The actual delay depends on the
Fax Server.
Long Pause [I] to pause between numbers. As Dial Pause, but a longer pause
is added between numbers.
Group Dial [\] sends to a group of fax numbers stored on the Fax Server.
Follow the Group Dial character with the Group number
configured on the Fax Server.
Mask data [/] to protect confidential information. Select the forward slash
character (/) before entering confidential numbers. After
entering the last confidential number, select the slash
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-53
character (/) again to turn off Mask Data. The characters or
numbers entered between the slash (/) characters are
displayed as asterisks (*).
Password Check Switch [S] for remote terminal identification. This character verifies that
the correct number has been dialed, which is very important if
sending a confidential document. A password is required
before transmission to a remote machine. For example,
1234567S4567 (where as 1234567 is the telephone number
and 4567 after the S is the password) instructs the machine to
check for validity, which is also known as Secure Send. The
machine does not dial any number after the S.
Pulse to Tone Switch [:] to switch between pulse and tone dialing.
Begin DTMF [*] start a sequence of DTMF characters.
End DTMF [#] end a sequence of DTMF characters.
Wait for network tone to suspend dialing until an expected network tone is detected.
detection [W] Or it can be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an
outside line or other services.
Local ID [+] character check required as part of some international telephone numbers (in
[+] place of 00).
Local ID [space] character to improve readability. For example, adding spaces to a
check [ ] telephone number as 1 234 5678 instead of 12345678.
Keypad
The keypad corresponds to the control panel telephone
keypad buttons.
Page 4-54
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
More Fax Features - Server Fax
When the More Fax Features tab is selected the following
Quick Pathway
features will be available:
Lighter / Darker - page 4-55
Original Input Size - page 4-56
Delayed Start - page 4-57
¾Select [Features]
button on the control
panel.
¾If necessary select
[Fax].
NOTE: If Fax is the default screen this tab will be called
Added Features. On selection it will change to More Fax
Features.
¾Select [More Fax
Features].
Lighter/Darker
Adjusts the image quality of the document being scanned.
¾ Load the document.
¾ Select [More Fax Features].
¾ Select [Lighter/Darker].
¾ Use the scroll bars to
increase or decrease the
image adjustment.
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Start].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-55
Original Input Size
Allows a user to manually select the size of the document when
the machine is unable to detect the document size, for example
when a document has a black border. Auto Size Detection is
the default setting.
NOTE: Auto Size Detection works with both the document
feeder and the document glass. Standard and Custom sizes
work with the platen glass only.
A message will only be displayed when the machine has
detected the document size.
¾ Select [Original Size].
¾ Select the option required.
¾ Select [Save].
Original Size Options
Auto accepts the machine’s automatic size sensing.The size
detected will be matched to a standard size paper.
Custom allows a non-standard paper size to be defined. To enter a
value use the scroll bars or select the X or Y numeric box to
display a pop-up window and enter the value using the keypad
displayed.
Standard pre-set document sizes available in the Select Size list.
Page 4-56
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Delayed Start
This feature allows a user to choose a time, within the next 24
hours, at which a fax will be sent.
IMPORTANT: The time to send is added to the job
information sent to the Fax Server with the scanned
image. The Third Party Fax Server retains the fax for
sending at this time.
¾ Load the document.
¾ Select [More Fax Features].
¾ Select [Delayed Start].
¾ Select [ON] - the options will
be displayed.
¾ Use the up/down scroll
arrows to indicate the start
hour, start minutes and AM/
PM.
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Start].
NOTE: This feature can be set
as a 12 hour or 24 hour clock.
NOTE: When enabled the default start time is 9.00PM.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-57
Authentication Mode - Server Fax
Authentication is used by the System Administrator to restrict
user access to the features within E-mail, Network Scanning
and Server Fax:
NOTE: If Authentication has been enabled it will be enabled
for all three services.
The following steps may vary depending on the authentication
mode set up by the System Administrator. Please contact the
System Administrator for further assistance.
Login - Guest Access
A login passcode is required.
¾ Using the control panel
keypad enter your passcode.
¾ Select [Enter].
Page 4-58
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Login - Network Authenticated Access
A login name and password are required.
¾ Select [Enter].
¾ Using the keyboard enter the
network user name.
NOTE: Select [More
Characters] if required.
¾ Select [Enter].
¾ Enter the network password.
NOTE: Select [More
Characters] if required.
¾ Select [Enter].
A pop-up message will be
displayed. The machine is now
processing the log in request.
The machine will now attempt to authenticate the user on the
network.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-59
Login - Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access
Both Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access can be
enabled together. This allows users to select how they wish to
login.
¾ Select [Network
Authenticated Access] and
then select [Enter].
¾ Enter the required login
details.
OR
¾ Select [Guest Access].
¾ Using the control panel
keypad enter your passcode.
¾ Select [Enter].
Changing the Authentication Service
If previously configured by the System Administrator, users
may select alternative authentication environments.
¾ If necessary, select [Network
Authenticated Access].
¾ Select [Enter].
The environment name that
appears in the [Change] button
will vary depending on the
network.
The example shown refers to a
DNS Domain.
¾ Select [Change DNS
Domain].
Page 4-60
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select the required network
environment.
¾ Select [Enter] to continue.
¾ Complete login to User Name
and Password.
If required, please contact the System Administrator for further
assistance.
Logging Off
¾ Select [Access]
A warning message will be
displayed.
¾ Select [OK].
NOTE: If a user is logged on to Network Accounting or the
Auditron at the same time as Authentication, the user will be
logged off the other service at the same time as logging off
from Authentication.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-61
LAN Fax (Local Area Network Fax)
When the Document Centre is connected to a network, faxes
can be sent from a Workstation directly to the Document
Centre to be forwarded on to the destination machine.
As with faxes scanned in at the Document Centre, faxes sent
over the network will be placed in the Fax Queue before being
sent on to the final destination.
NOTE: LAN Fax and Server Fax cannot be installed at the
same time.
LAN Fax Features
To send faxes over the network, users must select the
Document Centre as the printer in the Print Screen at the
Workstation. Selecting the pull down menu in Job Type will
display the Fax option. Selecting Fax will display Fax Setup
which can be used to set up the Fax features. The following
options are available for programming:
Fax used to enter the fax recipient information as well as select the
required resolution and cover page.
Phonebook use to store regularly used telephone numbers.
Cover Page enter the text that is to be printed on to the cover page.
Options use to identify specific dialing and sending requirements.
Refer to “Print” on page 8-1 for more information about the print
features.
NOTE: Refer to the CentreWare customer documentation for
further information on the LAN Fax features.
Page 4-62
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Managing Fax Jobs
Managing the Fax queues consists of maintaining each job
within the queue. Job management is performed on each
individual job contained within the queue. Controling jobs
includes organizing, advancing and initiating jobs based on
their characteristics.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Job Status] on
the control panel.
¾Select [Other Queues].
The Fax Queue and the Completed Fax Jobs Queue will only
be available in Job Status after Fax has been enabled.
¾Select [Fax Queue] or
[Completed Fax Jobs
Queue].
NOTE: If Server Fax is enabled then ‘received’ faxes will only
appear in the Print Queue.
Fax Queue
The Fax Queue button will only be displayed if Fax is available.
This queue maintains all fax jobs that are scanned and ready
to be transmitted, including LAN fax and outgoing Server Fax
jobs. The Fax Queue also contains fax scan jobs for delayed
fax jobs, including jobs sent to a mailbox and polling
reservation. The Fax Queue consists of jobs that are active or
waiting to be active (if the queue is full). Jobs are managed in
the order they were submitted. Delayed start, re-dial and re-
send jobs are in order based on start time.
The DC440/432/430/425 can have up to two embedded fax
lines available, making it possible to have two active jobs at
one time. Any job currently being sent or received via a
telephone line is considered active and is displayed on either
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-63
the top line or top two lines depending on the number of fax
lines available. Scroll to see information about each fax job in
the queue.
When sending a fax to multiple recipients (broadcast), the Fax
Queue displays the number of the first recipient when the job
is actively being sent to that recipient. Then, it displays the
second number in place of the first number and so on as each
number is dialed. A status of Completed in the Fax Queue
means the fax has been received.
Name the name or telephone number of the remote terminal that the
fax is sent to or received from. For network fax jobs, this is the
name of the job.
Type the type of job (such as broadcast, immediate send, LAN fax,
send, store for poll and so on).
Owner the creator of the job. For LAN fax jobs, this is the name of the
person submitting the job. For fax send, broadcast, mailbox
send and polling reservation jobs, the owner is displayed as
local.
Status information about the progress of an active or pending fax job,
such as sending, receiving, no active fax job, scanning,
pending and delay.
Pages the number of pages in a job. For queued fax send and
broadcast send jobs, the number of pages for transmission that
are stored in memory is displayed in the Pages column. For
queued fax poll and multi-poll jobs, the Pages column is empty.
The generated cover page is not counted as one of the
transmitted pages; however, it is counted as one of the
received pages. When a cover page is scanned in instead of
using the system-generated cover page, the machine counts
the page as a transmitted page. It counts all scanned pages.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Fax Queue to manage
jobs. When a toolbar button is selected a pop-up window is
displayed, select Confirm or Cancel to complete the requested
action.
Page 4-64
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Promote allows a pending fax send job to be promoted to the top of the
queue. Once promoted, the DC440/432/430/426/425/420
manages the prioritization of the jobs in the queue.
Delete deletes the selected active or pending job. A pop-up window
enables confirmation or cancellation of the request. If an active
job is deleted, communication stops immediately. The job is
removed from the Fax Queue and placed in the Completed Fax
Queue with an error code in the Status column. If a pending job
is deleted, it is removed from the Fax Queue and not listed in
any other queue.
Details displays additional information about the jobs in the Fax
Queue. A job can be stopped from the Details screen. The job
is removed from the Fax Queue and placed in the Completed
Fax Jobs Queue with an error in the Status column.
Other Queues displays the other job queues available.
Completed Fax Jobs Queue
The Completed Fax Queue button will only be displayed if Fax
is available.
Maintains completed fax jobs that were successful, or
terminated at the user’s request or due to a fault.
Name the name of the destination for the job.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-65
Type the job category, such as receive, broadcast, immediate LAN
fax, mailbox polled, mailbox polling, mailbox receive, mailbox
send, manual poll, polled, polling, send and unknown (power
interruption).
Owner the person who submitted the job. For LAN fax jobs, this is the
name of the person submitting the job. For fax send, broadcast,
mailbox send, and polling reservation jobs, the owner is
displayed as local.
Status information about the progress of the job, such as complete, or
an error indicated by a specific error code.
Pages the number of pages stored in memory for transmission and
the number of pages transmitted.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Print Queue to manage
jobs. When a toolbar button is selected a pop-up window is
displayed. Select Confirm or Cancel to complete the requested
action.
Details displays additional information about the job in the Completed
Fax Jobs Queue.
Other Queues displays the other job queues available.
Page 4-66
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Connecting Fax to the ISDN (Digital Line) - Embedded
Fax (DC440/432/430/425)
The Xerox DC440/432/430/425 is capable of working at a
maximum speed of 33.6Kbps across a good quality, analogue
telephone line to another fax machine with the same speed
capability. This speed is dependant upon the quality of the
connection; the poorer the quality, the slower the speed.
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) is a digital
alternative to the analogue network.
To connect the Xerox DC440/432/430/425 to the ISDN
requires the use of a Terminal Adapter (TA) to interface
between the machine’s analogue modem and the digital
network. Once connected to the TA, the machine will operate
in the same way as if it were connected to an analogue
telephone system. Fax documents can be sent or received in
exactly the same manner as before.
Currently, a standard ISDN line is capable of providing two
separate telephone connections, each of which can have its
own telephone number. The Xerox DC440/432/430/425 can
take full advantage of this feature and improve its productivity
by being fitted with a second fax option and connecting both fax
ports to a TA that supports two analogue ports. It will then be
capable of simultaneously sending and/or receiving two faxes
at the same time over the same ISDN line.
Terminal Adapters are available on the open market from a
variety of suppliers. Contact your chosen supplier to arrange
purchase and installation if required. In view of the number of
alternative suppliers available, exhaustive testing of every
available TA has not been undertaken by Xerox and therefore,
Xerox does not recommend any particular supplier. Some
products have, however, been tested by Xerox and have been
found to be compatible with the DC440/432/430/425 fax. The
local Xerox representative will be able to supply details of these
products.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 4-67
Page 4-68
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Using Media Print
ASCII Text, Postscript, PCL, TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)
and PDF (Portable Document Format) file formats can be
printed on the DC440/432/430/426/425/420.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
Use the following steps to make prints using Media Print.
¾Select [Media Print].
¾ Make sure the disk is DOS
formatted.
¾ At the workstation, select
[Print to File] and select the
options required for the job.
Print the files to the format
required and copy them on to
a floppy disk.
¾ At the DC440/432/430/426/
425/420 insert the disk into
the floppy drive.
Floppy Drive
Page 5-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [All Services]
¾ Select [Media Print].
¾ Select [Read Disk], the files
and directories contained on
the diskette will be displayed.
The files and directories will be
displayed in the Directory List.
Scroll through the list to find the
file to be printed.
If the file is inside a
subdirectory, select the
subdirectory to display the list of
files.
¾ To exit the subdirectory,
select [Close Directory].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 5-3
¾ Select the file to be printed.
The file name is automatically
added to the Print List. Select
the name again to remove it
from the list.
¾ When all of the files required
appear in the Print List, select
[Start].
The system reads the selected
files and submits them for
printing. Select [Print Queue] in
Job Status to review the job.
¾ On completion remove the
disk from the floppy drive.
NOTE: The disk must remain in the floppy drive until the
system has finished reading the files.
Page 5-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
6 Network Scanning
The Network Scanning option will be available on the DC440/
432/430/426/425/420 if the machine is connected to the
network and the optional E-mail and Network Scanning kit
(sometimes known as Scan to File kit) has been installed.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-1
Network Scanning
Network Scanning enables the creation of an electronic image
file by scanning an original document. The image file is placed
into a network filing location specified in a Template. A
template stores the user’s preferred network scanning options.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
NOTE: Typical network scanning options include the filing
destination of the image file, whether the document should be
scanned lighter or darker or if the document was double-
sided.
¾if necessary select [All
Services].
¾Select [Network
Scanning].
¾Select the Template
required.
When a template is selected at the Document Centre the
stored scanning setups are loaded. If a document is scanned
using this template then the image file created will be
processed according to the settings configured in the template.
The settings programmed for the selected template can be
temporarily amended using the features available on the touch
screen.
to the machine as a list of template names.
machine and is displayed at the top of the template list. The
Network Scanning screen also displays a summary of the
setups stored within the selected template, for example,
information on the filing location of the scanned image file.
For more information about the other features available refer to
the following:
Image Adjustment - page 6-7
Output Formats - page 6-14
Authentication Mode - page 6-22
NOTE: The Scan to Email option is not available on the
DC426/420. The following screen will only be displayed on the
DC440/432/430/425.
Page 6-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Summary Box Features
Directory the directory path where the file being scanned will be stored.
Document Folder/Name the name of the folder in which the image will be stored.
Image Quality any adjustments required for specific types of originals - Text,
Photo, Auto.
Original Size the size of the original document.
Sides Imaged selects 1 or 2 sided scanning.
Scan Resolution 600 x 600 dpi (DC440/430/432), 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
200 x 200 dpi, or 100 x 200 dpi.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-3
Templates and template list
The template list contains an ordered list of all the templates
available to the Document Centre. There are two types of
template that can be displayed:
- CentreWare Internet Services templates - template
names preceded with a “@” character
- CentreWare Scan Services templates - template names
not preceded with a “@” character
NOTE: Refer to the CentreWare Customer Documentation for
more information on CentreWare Scan Services templates.
The template @default will be automatically selected on
entering Network Scanning for the first time. If more than 6
templates are available the scroll buttons are used to move
down through the list.
HINT: Only one template can be selected at a time.
It is possible that the templates displayed may not be the latest
version, or that the list does not contain newly-created
templates. Selecting one of the following options will update
the template list:
Refresh List updates all the templates in the list. Templates that have been
deleted or added using CentreWare Scan Services will be
removed from or added to the list.
Refresh Template refreshes the selected template.
NOTE: CentreWare Scan Services stores templates in a
remote location called a template pool. Access to this
template pool is required by the Document Centre when
updating either the template list or an individual template
within Network Scanning.
Page 6-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Public and Private Templates
A template can contain either a public or private filing location
or repository.
Public Repository If a user selects a template that contains a public filing location
the scan job will be filed to that location without the user having
to enter a password to access the filing location.
Private Repository If a user selects a template that contains a private filing
location, a password must be entered for that job to be
successfully filed.
NOTE: If a template containing a private filing location is
selected and a password has not been entered then a pop-up
reminder will be displayed when Start is selected.
¾ Load the documents in the
Document Feeder or place
on the Document Glass.
¾ Select [All Services] and
then [Network Scanning].
¾ Select [Refresh List] to
update the template list.
¾ Select the template required.
HINT: The Summary Box on the right hand side of the
screen displays information about the template. Refer to
page 6-3 for more information.
If the template has been
configured with a Public
Repository:
¾ Select [Start]. The job will be
scanned, an electronic file
created and the file sent to
the destination as specified in
the chosen template.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-5
If the template has been set up
with a Private Repository:
¾ Select [Start]. A pop-up
window will be displayed
asking for a password to be
entered.
¾ Select [Output Format].
¾ Select [Login Name/
Password].
¾ Select [Password].
¾ Enter the password to access
the filing location.
¾ Select [Save] twice.
¾ Select [Start] to scan the job.
HINT: If it is known that the template contains a private filing
location, it is possible to select that template and then enter
the password before selecting Start.
¾ To check on the job progress
review the Scan Queue in
Job Status.
NOTE: This will only show
active or pending scan jobs.
Refer to “Managing Scan Jobs”
on page 6-26 for more detailed
information.
If requested, the Document Centre will print a confirmation
report. The report will display information about the Scan job
including the completed status of the job. For more information
please refer to “Managing Scan Jobs” on page 6-26
Page 6-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Image Adjustment
apply changes to a template.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
Image Adjustment.
¾Select [Network
Scanning].
Refer to the following for more information:
Original Size - page 6-8
¾Select [Image
Adjustment].
Basic Image Quality - page 6-9
Sides Imaged - page 6-10
Reduce/Enlarge - page 6-11
Stored Image Settings - page 6-12
Erase - page 6-13
NOTE: Any changes that are made using the Image
Adjustment features are discarded after the Clear All timer
expires, or the Clear All button is selected.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-7
Original Size
Use to enter the size of the document when scanning from the
Document Glass or the Document Feeder. The DC440/432/
430/426/425/420 uses this information to calculate the settings
for the original size that you specify.
NOTE: Auto is the default setting.
¾ Select [Original Size].
¾ Select the options required.
¾ Select [Save].
Original Size Options
Auto accepts the machine’s automatic size sensing.The size
detected will be matched to a standard size paper.
Custom allows a non-standard paper size to be defined. This feature
can only be used when a document is placed on the document
glass. To enter a value use the scroll bars or select the X or Y
numeric box to display a pop-up window and enter the value
using the keypad displayed.
Standard pre-set document sizes available in the Paper Size list. This
feature can only be used when a document is placed on the
document glass.
Page 6-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Basic Image Quality
This feature adjusts the image quality settings applied to the
scanned document.
¾ Select [Basic Image
Quality].
¾ Select the options required.
¾ Select [Save].
Basic Image Quality Options
The following options are used to define what type of original is
being used for scanning:
Text - used for scanning text, solids, line art, and halftones.
Auto - used to scan documents that contain halftones and
images or photographs.
Photo - used for scanning continuous-tone photographs.
HINT: For best results, scan a maximum of 5 photos in one
job, unless the machine has additional memory.
Auto Exposure enhances documents that have colored backgrounds. This
option is disabled if the original type is Photo.
Lighter/Darker adjusts the density of copies and scanned images in the Text,
Auto and Photo mode.
Sharpness(DC440/432/430/ enhances or decreases the sharpness level of fine lines and
425) edges. This feature is used with Photo mode.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-9
Sides Imaged
This feature enables users to scan single-sided or double-
sided documents.
NOTE: All scan jobs are stored as single-sided images.
¾ Select [Sides Imaged].
¾ Select the options required.
¾ Select [Save].
Sides Imaged Options
1 Sided scans side one of the document.
2 Sided scans both sides of the document.
2 Sided, Side 2 is Rotated scans both sides of the document, the second side image is
(DC440/432/430/425) rotated 180°.
Image Orientation select this feature to identify the orientation of the image as it
(DC440/432/430/425) appears in the document handler before scanning.
NOTE: The Document Feeder must be used when scanning 2
sided documents.
Print Local Copy This feature prints a single-sided copy of the scanned job.
(DC440/432/430/425)
Page 6-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Reduce/Enlarge
Adjusts the magnification size of the stored image file.
¾ Select [Reduce/Enlarge].
¾ Select the options required.
¾ Select [Save].
Reduce/Enlarge Options:
Normal reduces/enlarges the dimensions of the stored image file in
equal proportions.
Custom reduces or enlarges the dimensions of the document in non-
equal proportions. By setting the X and Y coordinates, the
length and width of the stored image file can be adjusted
separately.
100%: sets the magnification to 100%, size for size.
Auto reduces/enlarges a document automatically to a size that fits
the stored image size specified.
NOTE: Auto Reduce/Enlarge is only available when a
document is placed on the Document Glass.
50 - 200% enables settings to be adjusted in 1% increments.
NOTE: On the DC440/432/430/425 133% is the maximum
enlargement setting available with the 600 dpi option .
HINT: Selecting the numeric input area on the touch screen
displays a pop-up keypad which can be used to enter values.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-11
Stored Image Settings
Defines the image output requirements.
¾ Select [Stored Image
Settings].
¾ Select the options required.
¾ Select [Save].
Stored Image Settings Options
Resolution defines the resolution at which the original will be scanned and
the image stored. Select from 600 x 600 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 300
x 300 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, or 100 x 200 dpi.
NOTE: The greater the resolution selected the larger the size
of the stored image file. This will result in more time being
required to complete the scan job.
Stored Image Size defines the size of the stored image file.
Same as Original: produces an image size that
matches the size of the original document.
Auto: automatically adjust the image size based on the
document size and specified magnification setting.
Custom: defines the size of the stored image using the
X and Y axis buttons.
Output Image Format sets the format for the scanned image files to Tiff, Multipage
(DC440/432/430/425 ) Tiff or PDF files.
NOTE: Selecting TIFF will result in one image file being
created for each original side scanned. Selecting Multipage
Tiff or PDF will result in one image file being created for all
document sides scanned.
Page 6-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Erase
Used to erase unwanted marks from the scanned document.
¾ Select [Erase].
¾ Select the option required.
¾ Select [Save].
Erase Options
Off scanning is edge to edge.
Border Erase erases equal amounts (0–2 in) from the top, bottom and both
sides of the document.
Edge Erase erases amounts (0–2 in) specified from the top, bottom, and
both sides independently of each other.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-13
Output Format (or Filing Setups)
Quick Pathway
These settings may be altered and applied to the scan job.
Refer to the following for more information:
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
Server IP Address/Server Name - page 6-15
Document Path/Volume - page 6-16
Document Name - page 6-16
¾Select [Scan].
¾Select [Output
Formats].
Login Name/Password - page 6-17
If File Already Exists - page 6-17
Document Management Fields - page 6-18
NOTE: Any changes that are made using the Output Format
features are discarded after the Auto Clear timer expires, or
the Clear All button is selected.
Templates specify a file location in either a Netware or TCP/IP
network. The Output Format tab will display options for either a
Netware or TCP/IP filing location.
NOTE: The following screens relate to using Netware and will
vary slightly for TCP/IP.
¾ Select the features as
required.
¾ Apply changes.
¾ Select [Save].
¾ Select [Start].
Page 6-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Server IP Address /Server Name
For TCP/IP, enter the server IP address. For NetWare, enter
the server name, tree and context.
NOTE: Tree and Context are required for Netware NDS
environments.
For TCP/IP, users may specify an optional port number with
the filing location IP address. For example, to specify filing to
an IP port of 1026 enter 113.210.228.1:1026.
NOTE: The FTP server where the filing occurs will need to be
configured to accept this job over port 1026 for this scan to be
successful.
HINT: For scan jobs over TCP/IP the default port 21 is
automatically used.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-15
Document Path / Volume
This feature specifies the location of the directory path where
the scanned document will be placed.
- For TCP/IP: enter the Document Path
- For Netware: enter the Document Path and Volume
Document Name (or Document Folder)
This feature allows users to change the default Document
Name. For single page TIFF, the Document Name defines the
name of the folder where the image files are placed. For
Multipage TIFF/PDF the Document Name defines the name of
the image file stored.
NOTE: If the setting If File Already Exists is set to Rename
New File then this field is blank and any entries made will be
ignored by the Document Centre.
Page 6-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Login Name/Password
This feature is used to enter the login name and password of
the filing location that the scanned image file will be stored in.
NOTE: Use this feature if filing to a private filing location or if
there is a need to change the login information for the
scanned job.
If File Already Exists (or Filing Policy)
This feature determines how the scanned file will be stored in
the repository. The default setting can be changed and applied
to a scan job.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-17
There are four options available:
Filing Policy
Description
Rename New File
Do Not Save
the Document Centre
automatically names documents
being scanned.
the Document Centre names
documents being scanned using a
value defined by the user. If a file
or folder with the same name
already exists at the filing location
it will not be overwritten by the
device and the scan job is aborted.
Overwrite Existing
File
the Document Centre names
documents being scanned using a
value defined by the user. If a file or
folder with the same name already
exists then that file is overwritten.
Append to Existing
File
the Document Centre will add the
scanned images to files that
already exist in the filing location.
This feature can only be used with
a Single Page Tiff file format.
Document Management Fields (DC440/432/430/425)
This feature is only available when a template contains
Document Management Fields information. Templates
containing Document Management Fields information are
created using Internet Services or CentreWare Scan Services.
For more information refer to “Document Management Fields”
on page 9-22.
Page 6-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
NOTE: If Document Management Fields information has not
been entered into a template then the button will not be
selectable at the Document Centre.
Document Management Fields allow information to be stored
with the scanned files. This information can be accessed by
third party applications to retrieve or route the stored images.
A maximum of 6 entries can be displayed for editing at the
Document Centre. Users may be offered default values for an
entry and this value can be temporarily altered for the job being
scanned
Document Management Fields information is stored in the job
log (.xst) file along with the scanned image file.
Using a template containing Document
Management Fields information
NOTE: A template containing Document Management Field
information needs to be created. Refer to “Document
Management Fields” on page 9-22
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-19
¾ Place a document on the
Document Glass or in the
Document Feeder.
¾ Select [All Services].
¾ Select [Network Scanning].
¾ Select the required template
containing Document
Management Fields data.
The Document Management
Fields data contained in the
template will be displayed on
the touch screen.
Refer to the following to alter an entry:
¾ Select the required field on the touch screen.
¾ Enter the information required using the displayed
keyboard. Select [Save].
OR
¾ Select [Edit Next Value] to display the next available field.
NOTE: Edit Next Value will not be available if only one entry
appears in the template or if the last entry has been selected.
¾ Select [Save].
¾ Select [Start]. The job will now be scanned.
NOTE: Any changes that are made using this feature are
discarded after the Auto Clear timer expires, or the Clear All
button is selected.
If an attempt is made to submit another scan job with the same
Document Management Fields entries then the previously
entered data is automatically displayed to the user.
Refer to the following steps to manually change a Document
Management Field entry:
Page 6-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Network Scanning].
¾ Select [Output Format].
¾ Select [Document Management Fields]. The current
saved setting will be displayed.
¾ If required, select and change the options
¾ Select [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-21
Authentication Mode - Network Scanning
Authentication is used by the System Administrator to restrict
user access to the features within E-mail, Network Scanning
and Server Fax Services.
NOTE: If Authentication has been enabled it will be enabled
for all three services.
The following steps may vary depending on the authentication
mode set up by the System Administrator. Please contact the
System Administrator for further assistance.
Login - Guest Access
A login passcode is required.
¾ Using the control panel
keypad enter your passcode.
¾ Select [Enter].
Page 6-22
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Login - Network Authenticated Access
A login name and password are required.
¾ Select [Enter].
¾ Using the keyboard enter the
network user name.
NOTE: Select [More
Characters] if required.
¾ Select [Enter].
¾ Enter the network password.
NOTE: Select [More
Characters] if required.
¾ Select [Enter].
A pop-up message will be
displayed. The machine is now
processing the log-in request.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-23
Login - Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access
Both Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access can be
enabled together. This allows users to select how they wish to
login.
¾ Select [Network
Authenticated Access] and
then select [Enter].
¾ Enter the required login
details.
OR
¾ Select [Guest Access].
¾ Using the control panel
keypad enter your passcode.
¾ Select [Enter].
Changing the Authentication Service
If previously configured by the System Administrator, users
may select alternative authentication environments.
¾ If necessary, select [Network
Authenticated Access].
¾ Select [Enter].
The environment name that
appears in the [Change] button
will vary depending on the
network.
The example shown refers to a
DNS Domain.
¾ Select [Change DNS
Domain].
Page 6-24
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select the required network
environment.
¾ Select [Enter] to continue.
¾ Complete login to User Name
and Password.
If required, please contact the System Administrator for further
assistance.
Logging Off
¾ Select [Access]
.
A warning message will be
displayed.
¾ Select [OK].
NOTE: If a user is logged on to Network Accounting or
Auditron at the same time as Authentication, the user will be
logged off the other service at the same time as logging off
from Authentication.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-25
Managing Scan Jobs
Managing the Scan queues consists of maintaining each job
within the queue. Job management is performed on each
individual job contained within the queue. Controling jobs
includes organizing, advancing and initiating jobs based on
their characteristics.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Job Status] on
the control panel.
¾Select [Other Queues].
The Scan Queue and the Completed Scan Jobs Queue will
only be available in Job Status after Network Scanning or E-
mail has been enabled.
¾Select [Scan Queue] or
[Completed Scan Jobs
Queue].
Scan Queue
The Scan Queue displays all active scan jobs. Once a job has
been completed the job is deleted from this queue and
displayed in the Completed Scan Jobs queue.
.
This queue maintains active and pending scan jobs. The Scan
Queue can hold up to 50 jobs at one time. Active jobs appear
at the top of the queue and completed jobs follow in
descending order based on the job completion time.
When the queue reaches its capacity, the oldest jobs are
deleted to make room for new jobs. If all 50 jobs are active and
pending jobs, no new jobs will be added until an active job is
completed.
Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue.
Page 6-26
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Destination this is the destination folder for the job.
Type the type of job, based on the network setup.
Owner the name of the template owner, as defined in the template file.
Status information about the progress of a job, such as active or
faulted.
Scanned/Filed the number of sheets scanned and filed for active jobs.
Display displays information on the jobs contained in the Scan queue.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Scan Queue to manage
the jobs.
Delete deletes the selected job.
Details displays additional information about a job in the Scan Queue.
Other Queues displays the other job queues available
Completed Scan Jobs Queue (DC440/432/430/425)
The Completed Scan Jobs Queue displays information on all
Completed Scan jobs. Completed jobs are those that have
been either successfully completed or canceled due to a fault
or at the user’s request.
This queue can hold up to 50 jobs at one time. When the queue
reaches its capacity, the oldest jobs are deleted to make room
for new jobs.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 6-27
Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue.
Destination this is the destination folder for the job.
Type displays the filing protocol used - either TCP/IP or Netware.
Owner the name of the template owner, as defined in the template file.
Status information about a job, such as active or faulted.
Scanned/Filed the number of sheets scanned and the total number of pages
already successfully stored at the remote location.
Display displays information on the jobs contained in the Completed
Scan Jobs queue.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Completed Scan Jobs
Queue to manage the jobs.
Details displays additional information about a job in the Completed
Scan Jobs Queue.
Other Queues displays the other job queues available.
Page 6-28
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
7 E-mail
The E-mail option will only be available on the DC440/432/430/
425 if the machine is connected to the network and the optional
E-mail and Network Scanning kit has been installed.
Using the E-mail feature users are able to send scanned
images as e-mail attachments. Users can also add and remove
recipients, change the From e-mail address and edit the
Subject line of the e-mail message.
NOTE: Refer to the CentreWare Customer Documentation for
more information.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-1
Standard Features
Users can select the features available within the E-mail
screen to enter the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) e-
mail addresses, or search the internal / public address books
to select the address information to build the address list for a
job. Up to 128 recipient addresses can be entered in to the list.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
¾If necessary [All
Services].
The E-mail screen can be set up as the default on selection of
the Features button.
¾Select [E-mail].
Please refer to the following page for information on how to use
the E-mail feature. For more information about the features
available refer to:
Image Adjustment - page 7-7
Output Format - page 7-13
Authentication - page 7-14
Page 7-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Entering a manual E-mail address
Using the touch screen keypad, users are able to enter e-mail
addresses manually on the Document Centre.
¾ Load document into the
Document Feeder or place it
on the Document Glass.
¾ Select [E-mail].
¾ Select [To].
¾ Using the keypad enter the
recipient details.
NOTE: Use the buttons along
the top to access further
options.
¾ Select [Enter].
The address will appear in the
Address List - refer to example.
¾ Repeat the above steps as
required for Cc, Bcc, From
and Edit Subject.
NOTE: The From address
cannot be changed if E-mail
has been accessed via the
Authentication Mode.
¾ Select [Start] to scan the
original and send the e-mail.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-3
Once an entry appears in the Address List users are able to
select:
Details to display the recipient address details and From addresses.
NOTE: The Address information displayed is determined by
how the address was originally added to the Address List -
from the Internal Address Book, Public Address Book or
entered manually. Refer to “Using the Address Books” on
page 7-4 for more information about Address Books.
HINT: When selecting a From entry a user can select the
Reply to button to edit the Reply to address.
Remove to delete the selected address.
Remove All to delete all the addresses. A confirmation pop-up message
will be displayed.
Using the Address Books
The DC440/432/430/425 is able to support two types of e-mail
address books. When an entry is made in the To, From, CC, or
Bcc the Address Book displays search results for either or both
configured address books.
If both address books are configured users can select the
Change Address Book button to submit the search in the other
address book
Please refer to the following pages for more information about
the Public Address Book and Internal Address Book.
Page 7-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Public Address Book
Stores external company addresses on the machine. Created
by the System Administrator within Internet Services.
The DC440/432/430/425 will accept a Public Address Book
file that contains a list of user names and their e-mail
addresses. This file must be of the CSV (Comma Separated
Values) format for the device to be able to read the file
contents.
NOTE: The majority of word processing packages will allow
you to create a CSV file. A selection of e-mail applications will
also allow you to export a list of users in the CSV file format.
The completed file is imported to the device via CentreWare
Internet Services The DC440/432/430/425 will not allow the
import of an Public Address Book file that does not end with
the .CSV file extension.
A valid CSV file is of the format <name>, <SMTP e-mail
address>. For example the following are both valid format
CSV file entries:
Smith, [email protected]
"Smith, John",[email protected]
NOTE: The order in which entries are displayed in the Public
Address Book at the Document Centre will depend on how the
entries are sorted in the CSV file.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-5
Internal Address Book
Otherwise known as the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) stores internal company addresses on the company
network. The Internal Address Book is created by the System
Administrator.
The Document Centre will display search results for the
Internal Address Book as defined by the LDAP configuration.
For example, an LDAP server can return a search enquiry
"And" as "Andrew Smith" when the result "Andrews, James"
may have been expected.
The <lastname, firstname> or ,<firstname, lastname> display
behaviour is controlled by the LDAP server and not the
Document Centre.
NOTE: The LDAP configuration may also return other search
results, for example "AndrewS" for the same search query.
If a user has successfully logged into a device with
Authentication enabled and LDAP configured the DC440/432/
430/425 will attempt to automatically match the user’s login
name to their e-mail address. The user’s e-mail address will
then be used to populate the "From" e-mail address field. This
enables recipients of e-mail jobs to identify the originator of
the e-mail job.
NOTE: Users will not be able to change the user’s "From"
address if the user has logged in using Network Authenticated
Access. This prevents untraceable e-mail jobs being sent from
the Document Centre.
Page 7-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Image Adjustment
document being scanned.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel
Adjustment.
¾Select [E-mail]
¾Select [Image
Adjustment]
Refer to the following for more information:
Original Size - page 7-8
Basic Image Quality - page 7-9
Sides Imaged - page 7-10
Stored Image Settings - page 7-11
Erase - page 7-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-7
Original Size
Used to enter the size of the document when scanning from the
Document Glass or the Document Feeder.
¾ Select [Original Size].
¾ Select the option required.
¾ Select [Save].
Original Size Options
Auto accepts the machine’s automatic size sensing. Do not use
Auto for non-standard sizes. The machine cannot sense the
size of non-standard documents.
NOTE: Auto is the default setting. Mixed Size Originals is
always enabled to Auto.
Custom to define the size by programming the X and Y settings for non-
standard sizes. Use either the scroll bars to enter the value or
select a numeric box to display a pop-up screen and enter the
value using the keypad displayed. This feature can only be
used when a document is placed on the document glass.
Standard pre-set document sizes automatically available in the Paper
Size list. This feature can only be used when a document is
placed on the document glass.
Page 7-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Basic Image Quality
Adjusts the settings for the output.
¾ Select [Basic Image
Quality].
¾ Select the option required.
¾ Select [Save].
Basic Image Quality Options
Text - used for scanning text, solids, line art, and halftones.
Auto - used to scan documents that contain halftones and
mixed images.
Photo - used for scanning continuous-tone photographs and
high-quality halftones.
Auto Exposure enhances documents that have colored backgrounds.
Lighter/Darker adjusts the density of copies and scanned images in the Text,
Auto and Photo mode.
Sharpness enhances or decreases the sharpness level of fine lines and
edges during Photo mode image processing.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-9
Sides Imaged
This feature enables users to scan a single-sided or double-
sided job.
¾ Select [Sides Imaged].
¾ Select the option required.
¾ Select [Save].
Sides Imaged Options
1 Sided scans the document as a single-sided job. This is the default
setting on the machine.
2 Sided scans the document as a head to head double-sided job.
2 Sided, Side 2 is Rotated scans the document as a head to toe double-sided job.
NOTE: The Document Feeder must be used when scanning 2
sided documents.
Image Orientation select this feature to identify the orientation of the image before
scanning.
Print Local Copy This feature prints a single copy of the scanned image file on
successful completion of the job.
NOTE: Stapled output will not be available.
Page 7-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Stored Image Settings
Defines the resolution and the file format in which to send
scanned images.
¾ Select [Stored Image
Settings].
¾ Select the option required.
¾ Select [Save].
Stored Image Settings Options
Resolution defines the scan resolution options. Select from 600 x 600 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, or 100 x 200 dpi.
Output Image Format sets the format for scanned images to Tiff, Multipage Tiff or
PDF files.
NOTE: The System Administrator sets up the default settings
for Resolution and Output Image Format features via the Web
UI.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-11
HINT: Multi page and Single page TIFF files are formatted
with the *.TIF extension. PDF files are formatted with the
*.PDF file extension.
Erase
Erases unwanted marks from the edges of a scanned
document.
¾ Select [Erase].
¾ Select the option required.
¾ Select [Save].
Erase Options
Off scanning is edge to edge.
Border Erase erases equal amounts (0–2 in) from the top, bottom and both
sides of the document.
Edge Erase erases amounts (0–2 in) specified from the top, bottom, and
both sides independent of each other.
Page 7-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Output Format
Select this tab to enter additional programming for the
following:
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Features] on
the control panel.
¾Select [E-mail].
¾Select [Output
Format].
Reply to
Used to enter a reply to e-mail address or to search a
configured address book.
NOTE: This feature can also be accessed from the Reply to
button on the From details screen.
¾ Select [Reply to].
¾ Enter the e-mail address
using the keypad on the
touch screen.
¾ Select [Enter].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-13
Authentication Mode - E-mail
Authentication is used by the System Administrator to restrict
user access to the features within E-mail, Network Scanning
and Server Fax Services.
NOTE: If Authentication has been enabled it will be enabled
for all three services.
The following steps may vary depending on the authentication
mode set up by the System Administrator. Please contact the
System Administrator for further assistance.
Login - Guest Access
A login passcode is required.
¾ Using the control panel
keypad enter your passcode.
¾ Select [Enter].
Page 7-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Login - Network Authenticated Access
A login name and password are required.
¾ Select [Enter].
¾ Using the keyboard enter the
network user name.
NOTE: Select [More
Characters] if required.
¾ Select [Enter].
¾ Enter the network password.
¾ Select [Enter].
NOTE: Select [More
Characters] if required.
A pop-up message will be
displayed. The machine is now
processing the log-in request.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-15
Login - Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access
Both Guest Access and Network Authenticated Access can be
enabled together. This allows users to select how they wish to
login.
¾ Select [Network
Authenticated Access] and
then select [Enter].
¾ Enter the required login
details.
OR
¾ Select [Guest Access].
¾ Using the control panel
keypad enter your passcode.
¾ Select [Enter].
NOTE: The From address cannot be changed if E-mail has
been accessed via the Authentication Mode.
Page 7-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Changing the Authentication Service
If previously configured by the System Administrator, users
may select alternative authentication environments.
¾ If necessary, select [Network
Authenticated Access].
¾ Select [Enter].
The environment name that
appears in the [Change] button
will vary depending on the
network.
The example shown refers to a
DNS Domain.
¾ Select [Change DNS Domain].
¾ Select the required network
environment.
¾ Select [Enter] to continue.
¾ Complete login to User Name
and Password.
If required, please contact the System Administrator for further
assistance.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-17
Logging Off
¾ Select [Access]
.
A warning message will be
displayed.
¾ Select [OK].
NOTE: If a user is logged on to Network Accounting or the
Auditron at the same time as Authentication, the user will be
logged off the other service at the same time as logging off
from Authentication.
Page 7-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Managing Scan Jobs
Managing the Scan queues consists of maintaining each job
within the queue. Job management is performed on each
individual job contained within the queue. Controling jobs
includes organizing, advancing and initiating jobs based on
their characteristics.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Job Status] on
the control panel.
¾Select [Other Queues].
The Scan Queue and the Completed Scan Jobs Queue will
only be available in Job Status after E-mail and Network
Scanning has been enabled.
¾Select [Scan Queue] or
[Completed Scan Jobs
Queue].
Scan Queue
The Scan Queue displays all active scan jobs. Once a job has
been completed the job is deleted from this queue and
displayed in the Completed Scan Jobs queue.
.
This queue maintains active and pending Scan jobs. The Scan
Queue can hold up to 50 jobs at one time. Active jobs appear
at the top of the queue, other jobs follow in descending order
based on the job completion time.
When the queue reaches its capacity, the oldest jobs are
deleted to make room for new jobs. If all 50 jobs are active and
pending jobs, no new jobs will be added until an active job is
completed.
Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-19
Destination this is the destination folder for the job.
Type the type of job, based on the network setup.
Owner the name of the template owner, as defined in the template file.
Status information about the progress of a job, such as active or
faulted.
Scanned/Filed the number of sheets scanned and filed for active jobs.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Scan Queue to manage
the jobs.
Delete deletes the selected job.
Details displays additional information about a job in the Scan Queue.
Other Queues displays the other job queues available
Completed Scan Jobs Queue
The Completed Scan Jobs Queue displays information on all
completed scan jobs. Completed jobs are those that have been
either successfully completed or canceled due to a fault or at
the user’s request.
This queue can hold up to 50 jobs at one time. When the queue
reaches its capacity, the oldest jobs are deleted to make room
for new jobs.
Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue.
Page 7-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Destination this is the destination folder for the job.
Type displays the filing protocol used - either TCP/IP or NetWare.
Owner the name of the template owner, as defined in the template file.
Status information about a job, such as active or faulted.
Scanned/Filed the number of sheets scanned and the total number of pages
already successfully stored at the remote location.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Completed Scan Jobs
Queue to manage the jobs.
Details displays additional information about a job in the Completed
Scan Jobs Queue.
Other Queues displays the other job queues available.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 7-21
Page 7-22
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Print Driver Features
When selecting the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 as the
printer, the associated print screen will be displayed on the
workstation.
Select [Print] from the toolbar in the software program to
display the print screen.
The following pages describe the options that may be
available on the print driver.
About tab provides the software version number and copyright
information.
User Preferences tab selects Document Monitor to view status of print and fax jobs
from a desktop, and the selection of custom default paper
sizes.
System Configuration tab tick the boxes next to the options that are installed on the
machine. Select paper sizes applicable to the Paper Trays.
Fonts lists the fonts available.
Paper/Output tab selects options such as the job type and the number of copies.
The choices available are based on the options installed on the
machine. Use the scroll arrows to change the default settings.
To display the job type list, use the arrow scroll button next to
Normal Print. (If the fax option is not connected, only the print
types will be available.)
Available Job types:
- Normal Print—displays the print driver screen features.
- Fax—within Fax Setup are recipient, fax phone book,
cover page and dial/send options.
NOTE: This is only available with LAN Fax.
- Delay Print— delays processing a job until a later time.
After selecting Delay Print, enter the time of day the job is
to be processed. The job will be placed on hold until the
Page 8-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
specified time. The job is then released automatically and
placed at the end of the list of pending jobs in the Print
Queue. The job is then formatted and printed as a normal
job.
Jobs can be released either locally or remotely, prior to
the specified time. To release a job, select the job in the
Print Queue and select Release. The job will be placed
at the end of the pending jobs in the Print Queue and
processed normally.
- Secure Print— enables a password to be entered to
protect a job. The job will be held in a queue and not
printed until the same password is entered at the DC440/
432/430/426/425/420.
To print the job, select the job in the Print Queue and
press the Release button. The Secure Print Login pop-
up window prompts a password to be entered to release
and print the job. If a time-out period is enabled and the
job is not released during this time, the machine
automatically deletes the job.
- Sample Print— enables users to print and proof a single
copy of a document before printing the remaining
document sets/copies. The remaining sets are held in the
Document Centre print queue until the job is released via
the Document Centre control panel.
NOTE: When using this feature ensure that the Print dialog in
the application does not provide a Collate option. If it does,
turn the Collate option OFF in order for the Sample Set feature
to work properly. If Collate is not turned OFF, the application
may submit the entire job as a single document.
- Layout/Watermarks tab— used to change the layout of
a document and add watermarks. For example, to display
the word DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL diagonally across
each page. This feature also adjusts the size and
placement of the watermark and enables the review of a
sample page. In addition, documents can be printed 1 Up,
2 Up and so on, up to 16 Up. Booklet Creation is also
available from this screen.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 8-3
Document Options tab use this screen to select banner sheets, transparency
separator pages and to set margins.
Image Options tab use to select a negative image, mirror image, or bitmap
smoothing for a document. This feature can also be used to
adjust the brightness, contrast, resolution, and magnification.
Draft Mode printing enables the document to be printed in a
reduced quality mode, which uses less dry ink.
Graphics mode selects specific options when printing graphics, for example
raster or vector.
PostScript tab use this screen to select the postscript output options and to
compress Bitmaps, which saves memory and enables faster
printing.
General tab prints a test page.
Details tab use to send print to a new port or a new network path, update
or change print drivers and select time-out settings.
Capture Settings tab enables selection of Capture Print Port, Form and Job (for
example banner, copies). Use to map or remove the mapping
to the network drive, change page dimensions and select a
banner page, number of copies etc.
Page 8-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Tower Mailbox
If the Tower Mailbox is fitted, print jobs can be sent to a mailbox
bin. Mailboxes are normally assigned by the System
Administrator. The mailbox contains 10 bins.
On the DC440/432/430/425 each bin can accommodate 5 1/2”
x 8 1/2” 8 1/2” x 11” long edge feed and 11” x 17” short edge
feed paper sizes and can hold approximately 100 sheets of
20lb (substance 20). On the DC426/420 each bin can
accommodate5 1/2” x 8 1/2” 8 1/2” x 11” long edge feed and
11” x 17” short edge feed paper sizes and can hold
approximately 70 sheets of 20lb (substance 20). Each bin
contains a Bin Full sensor that indicates when the bin is full,
and a message will appear on the workstation screen. Output
is delivered face down in the bins.
NOTE: Envelopes should be fed to the center tray only.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 8-5
Managing Print Jobs
Job management can be carried out on each individual job
contained within the Print Queue. The Print Queue maintains
all pending and active jobs that are to be printed (Paused jobs
are considered active jobs). These include network print jobs,
Fax print jobs, report jobs and copy jobs.
Quick Pathway
¾Select [Job Status] on
the control panel
¾The Print Queue will be
displayed
¾To display the
Completed Print Job
Queue select [Other
Queues] and
[Completed Print Jobs
Queue]
Print Queue
The Print Queue can hold approximately 500 jobs at one time.
Jobs are placed in the queue according to job priority and type.
When full, the queue will not accept any more jobs. As space
becomes available new jobs will enter the queue.
Job # a number is assigned to identify each job.
Page 8-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Name the name of the job. For copy jobs, the default name local is
used. For network print jobs and reports, the name of the file is
used. For faxes received, the name is typically the remote fax
ID number.
NOTE: Depending on the Third Party Server, different entries
might be displayed for Server Fax jobs.
Type the type of job. For example, Copy, Fax, Print or Proof Print.
NOTE: Server Fax print jobs will be reported as Fax Receive
Owner if this feature is enabled the column will show the name of the
person who submitted the job. For walk-up jobs, the default
name displayed is local. For Embedded Fax jobs, no owner
name is displayed. For Server Fax jobs, an owner name will be
displayed. For LAN Fax jobs it will be the person who submitted
the job.
Status information about the progress of a job, such as printing,
scanning, formatting.
Priority identifies the printing priority assigned to the job type.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Print Queue to manage
jobs. When a toolbar button is selected a pop-up window is
displayed. Select Confirm or Cancel to complete the requested
action.
Promote moves a job ahead of all other jobs that have the same status
and priority. Only jobs with a Pending or Held status can be
promoted. If more than one job with the same priority is
promoted, the jobs will be arranged in first-in, first-out order.
Jobs can be promoted at any time.
NOTE: It is recommended that jobs are only promoted in an
emergency.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 8-7
Release removes the selected job from memory and completes it as
instructed. Jobs are held due to missing resources for
example, embedded fax, print, sample set, delayed print and
secure print jobs.
Embedded Fax jobs can be labeled as Held due to incorrect
paper size (the document size required is not available).
Releasing a fax job forces the machine to print the fax on any
available paper, which might require a reduction or other
modification, it is held in memory until the problem is resolved.
A password is required to release a Secure Print job. Each user
sets his or her password(s) at the network user application
driver. Different passwords for each job, or one password for
all jobs can be set. Other jobs in the queue bypass this job and
are completed. After a problem has been resolved, or when
ready to print the held job, select the job and touch Release.
Delete deletes the selected job from the Print Queue. After the job is
deleted, all of the resources allocated to that job are also
released. In an open system (no access control), any job can
be deleted by any user. If an active job is deleted, it stops
printing immediately and is placed in the Completed Print Jobs
Queue, where it is listed as Canceled by User. If a pending job
is deleted, it is removed from the Print Queue and is placed in
the Completed Print Jobs Queue, where it is listed as a
canceled job.
NOTE: Only the owner of a job should delete the job.
Details displays additional programming information about the jobs in
the Print Queue. For held jobs, the Details screen includes
information about how to release the job
Other Queues displays the other job queues available.
Page 8-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Completed Print Jobs Queue
Maintains completed print jobs including Server Fax (received)
jobs. Jobs are considered complete when they are
successfully printed, or terminated at the user’s request or due
to a fault. The queue contains the last 50 completed print jobs.
Jobs are maintained on a first-in, first-out basis and organized
in order of completion.
Use the scroll buttons to move through the jobs in the queue.
Item the number in sequence for the job.
Name the name of the document or the remote terminal.
Type the type of job, for example Copy.
Owner the creator of the job. For print jobs, this is the person who
submitted the job.
Status information about the progress of the completed job. This
includes completed jobs, faulted jobs, jobs canceled by users
and jobs canceled by the system.
Time completed the time and date when the job entered the queue.
Use the toolbar across the top of the Completed Print Jobs
Queue to manage jobs.
Details displays additional information about the jobs in the queue.
Other Queues displays the other job queues available.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 8-9
Page 8-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
9 Internet Services
Internet Services utilizes the embedded Web User Interface
which enables communication between the HTTP server and
the DC440/432/430/426/425/420. Internet Services can be
used in conjunction with scanning, e-mailing, printing and
faxing.
NOTE: This feature must be installed and set up by the
System Administrator prior to use. After installation some of
the Internet Services features will have restricted access.
Contact the System Administrator for further assistance if
required.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-1
Standard Features - Internet Services
By entering the IP Address of the DC440/432/430/426/425/
420 as the URL (Universal Resource Locator) in the Browser,
direct access to the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 is available.
NOTE: Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4.x or later, or
Netscape Navigator 4.x or later, should be used. Other
browsers may work, but could produce unexpected results.
When accessed, the Home Page for the Web UI displays with
the following options:
¾ Services
¾ Queue
¾ Status
¾ Properties
¾ Maintenance
¾ Assistance
Interface Options
The following table describes the various programming options
available when using Internet Services:
Function
Action
Pages
Displays the available features.
Frames
Normally a left or right frame. The left frame
contains the Document Centre status
information. On some pages, information in
the left frame is shown in a tree or directory/
folder format. Selecting an icon or name will
expand the tree and/or display further informa-
tion in the right frame.
Feature pages
Divided into a left and right frame.
Page 9-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Function
Action
Services Tab Radio Buttons
Accesses the Job Submission or Stored
Template service area page.
Apply (new settings, settings)
Cancel
Applies changes.
Exits the page without updating.
Device Index
Accesses Internet Services index for the Doc-
ument Centre.
Help
Context sensitive Help is provided with Inter-
net Services. Use the Help buttons and menus
to access further information.
Print/Fax Submission
Submits a job for printing or faxing.
Refresh (status, now, latest values, jobs)
Restore Settings
Update the page with the new information.
Returns the features to their last saved
settings.
Restore Default Values
Browse
Returns the features to their default values.
Accesses the network or local directory paths.
The Browse buttons do not appear if Internet
Explorer version 3.0 or less is being used
Device Home
Queue
Accesses the Document Centre home page.
Refreshes the job listing.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-3
Services Tab
There are two options available within Services.
¾ Job Submission is used to submit print ready jobs to the
Document Centre
¾ Stored Templates contains the templates created in Internet
Services for controlling Scan to File jobs.
NOTE: Print files should not be larger than 6 MB.
Job Submission
¾ Select [Services].
¾ Select [Job Submission]. Job Attributes will be displayed.
If required:
¾ Type in the number of copies.
¾ Using the drop-down lists, select other options.
¾ Type the path and file name or select [Browse] (if available)
to locate the file to be used.
¾ Select the on screen green [Start] button to submit the job.
NOTE: Existing preformatted jobs do not take priority over
Job Based Accounting (DC440/432/430/425)
(optional)
If Job Based Accounting has been setup on the DC440/432/
430/425 users will be prompted to enter a User Name and
Account ID before submitting the job to the machine.
Refer to “Job Based Accounting (optional) (DC440/432/430/
425)” on page 11-82 for more information.
Page 9-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Stored Templates
Stored Templates allows users to create/modify and remove
Scan to File templates that reside on the Document Centre.
The template itself determines the settings specific to that
Scan job. This option will only be available if Network Scanning
has been enabled on the Document Centre.
¾ Select [Services].
¾ Select [Stored Templates].
If necessary use the new, delete or copy buttons located at the
top of the screen to create, remove or copy a template.
NOTE: If an entry has already been applied in Document
Management Fields and a change is required, select either
the Add, Edit or Delete buttons located on the right hand side
of the Document Management Fields box to create, modify or
delete an entry for the template. Select Add New Field to save
22 for more information about this feature.
¾ Go to the Document Centre and select [Scan] on the Touch
Screen.
¾ Select the template.
¾ Load the documents and select [Start].
For more information about Stored Templates refer to
“Template Management” on page 9-16.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-5
Queue Tab
The Queue tab enables users to promote, delete or release a
job in the Document Centre print queue.
NOTE: There is a time delay in refreshing the true status of
deleted and promoted jobs. Select Refresh Job after deleting
or promoting a queued print job.
¾ Select [Queue]. The Document Centre queue information
will be displayed.
¾ Select [Refresh Jobs] to update the job list.
¾ Select the required job and then select either:
- [Promote] to process the job before processing other
jobs in the queue
NOTE: Only jobs that are pending can be promoted.
- [Delete] to remove the job from the print queue.
- [Release] to allow the job to process.
NOTE: As standard, all users can promote and delete any
print job. Contact the System Administrator for further
assistance.
Page 9-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Status Tab
The Status tab allows users to review the current status of the
input and output trays available on the Document Centre.
¾ Select [Status]. The status of the Document Centre
displays in the left frame. The tray status, including the size,
color and type of media, tray availability and output tray is
displayed in the right frame. Use the scroll bars to view
more information.
¾ Select [Refresh Status] to update the information.
¾ Select [Reboot Machine] to remotely reboot the machine.
NOTE: The Reboot button can only be accessed by the
System Administrator.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-7
Properties Tab
Properties are the settings that control the Document Centre
and how it operates.
The settings contained within the Properties tab can only be
modified by System Administrators.
¾ Select [Properties].
¾ Select the option required.
Refer to the following table for more information about the
options available.
Page 9-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Properties Features
Feature Name
General Setup:
Action
System
Contains the job option defaults and the actual
location of the Document Centre.
Job Management (DC440/432/430/425)
Provides the System Administrator with the
ability to set permissions for the category of
user who may delete jobs from the Queue.
Media Size Conversion
Used for the conversion of A4/A3 and letter/
ledger size paper for printing. When enabled
the Document Centre will check the status of
the paper trays for the paper size required for
printing. If a tray is not configured for the
required paper size the system will convert the
job to print on a size that is available.
Contention Management
These settings control the scan, print and fax
job priorities. Copy priority is fixed at 3 and
cannot be changed. Print and Fax priorities
can be adjusted, however if Fax is not enabled
the Fax priority will not apply.
Power Saver
Sets the timings for the power saver feature
on the Document Centre.
Printer Languages:
Connectivity:
Contains PostScript, PCL or TIFF setup
options for the Document Centre.
The following two options will be available:
Interfaces
Used to modify the Port Configurations.
Protocols
Use to modify the network protocols.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-9
Feature Name
Action
Services:
Allows System Administrators to view or set
parameters for stored templates, set up repos-
itories / template pools, modify the default
template and modify printer settings.
Internet Messaging (DC440/432/430/425)
The System Administrator uses this feature to
set up default e-mail features and functionality.
This feature will only be available once E-mail
has been installed on the machine.
• General - this is where the transmission
details are set up for outgoing messages
• E-mail Settings - used to enter the E-mail
IP address. This feature displays the
properties related to Defaults and Message
Content.
• LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) Directory - displays the
properties related to the LDAP server.
• Public Address Book - this feature is
available when any Internet messaging
service that uses machine-stored
addresses is installed on the machine.
Authentication Server (DC440/432/430/425)
This feature allows the System Administrator
to set up the required network defaults and
settings to support the e-mail feature. This
feature will only be available once E-mail has
been installed on the machine.
• General - displays the Authentication Type
applied and its associated properties.
Stored Templates
General
Accesses the defaults for scan jobs.
• Append to Existing File - the scanned
document is added to the previously
scanned files under the specified document
folder.
Page 9-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Feature Name
Services cont...
Action
• Overwrite Existing File - the scanned
document overwrites the previously
scanned files under the specified document
folder.
• Do Not Save - when scanning to file, the
newly scanned files are created under a
new document folder that matches the
document name specified in the template’s
File service.
• Rename New File - when scanning to file
the new document is given a generated
name that is derived from the date and time
stamp of the file server.
Repository Setup
Selects a file server repository for configura-
tion.
Template Pool Setup
Used to set up a server for the template pool.
Default Template
Provides a basic format and options for
scanned, printed, or faxed documents. System
Administrators can modify the default
templates. The settings defined here are the
defaults for the user templates that are
selected in Services, Stored Templates.
Print Setup
Specifies the printing defaults for the
Document Centre.
Server Fax Setup (DC440/432/430/425)
Enables the System Administrator to set up
the Fax Repository from the Web.
Accessories:
Only available if the Tower Mailbox is fitted as
an accessory to the Document Centre.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-11
Feature Name
Action
Portfolio:
Contains the Document Centre service infor-
mation. Xerox and system contact information,
the Document Centre profile, fault history and
billing meters are also included here.
Page 9-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Maintenance Tab
Maintenance provides a way to view and test printer functions
on the Document Centre.
¾ Select [Maintenance] and the option required.
- Font Listing displays a listing of PCL and PostScript
fonts.
- Print Test Page enables a test page to be printed at the
machine.
- Reports displays a list of the reports that are available for
printing.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-13
Assistance Tab
Use Assistance to access the internet links for software,
browser and Xerox support.
¾ Select [Assistance].
¾ Select the option required to access the relevant
information.
NOTE: The Customer Support and Service numbers entered
here will also be displayed on the DC440/432/430/426/425/
420.
Page 9-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Scanning with Internet Services
This section explains the components, functions and
procedures for Network Scanning or Scan to File. Refer to the
Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 System
Administration Guide, Chapter 6 of this User Guide and the
CentreWare documentation for more information.
Public and Private Repositories
Repositories are directories or filing destinations set up on a
server where files and saved documents created by scanning
are held. Documents can be scanned to either a public or
private repository.
Public repositories are validated by Internet Services when
defined by the System Administrator as a scanning destination.
These repositories are set up on the Properties, Services,
Stored Templates, Repository Setup page. The application
checks for the existence of the scanning username, password
and path. Up to five public repositories (1 default and 4
additional) can be defined. After the repositories are set up,
they are available to users as choices when modifying
templates.
Private repositories are not validated by Internet Services and
therefore, when defining private repositories, the directory
specified must exist on the file server or local drive. Private
repositories are specific to a particular template and can be
defined by administrators on the Properties, Services, Stored
Templates, Default Template page or by users on the Services,
Stored Templates page. When a template containing a private
repository is selected by the user, the correct user name and
password to access that filing location must be entered at the
Document Centre.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-15
Template Pools
Template pools are directories where scanning templates
reside. With Internet Services, an existing directory on a file
server can be designated as a pool for DC440/432/430/426/
425/420 templates.
Template Management
Templates are used for scanning, faxing or printing jobs at the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 control panel. Users can select a
template to use “as is,” or use Internet Services to create a
brand new one, or modify an existing one.
The following three buttons are used to manage templates in
Services/Stored Templates:
Button
Operation
[New]
Creates a new template with the
default template attributes.
[Delete]
[Copy]
Deletes the selected template.
Copies the selected template to a
new renamed template.
Template Summary
Individual Template Summaries are accessed via Services,
Stored Templates or Properties, Services, Default Template
and contain information about the template’s current scan,
print, or fax settings. The summary contains the template name
and the selected services for the template, along with the
parameters specified for each defined service.
NOTE: Templates with the ‘@’ symbol at the beginning of a
name are created with Internet Services. These templates
cannot take advantage of the distribution capabilities of
Network Scanning Services.
Page 9-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Template Services
Services provide the file, fax, print and scan parameters for
template operation. These are defined by the System
Administrator on the default template, but users can change
the parameters of a template in Stored Templates by creating
a new template or modifying an existing template. For
example, a private repository can be defined in a File Service
for a specific scanning template. The minimum requirement is
that either File or Fax Service needs to be specified for a
template.
The following table shows the available File, Fax, Print Local
Copy and Scan Services that can be defined in a template and
the available parameters or options for each service. These
appear in the Services checkbox in a template.
Services
File
Parameters
Description
Scan to PaperPort Desktop Indicates that the template is used
for scanning with the Visioneer
PaperPort application.
Filing Destination
Defines the address or path for the
network location for scanned docu-
ment files.
Protocols
Protocol in use on the network,
either TCP/IP or NetWare.
Repository Type
Public or private repository for
scanned document files.
File Server IP Address
(TCP/IP)
Server IP address and optional port
number.
Server Name (NetWare)
Server Volume (NetWare)
NDS Context (NetWare)
NDS Tree (NetWare)
Name of the server.
Netware Volume name.
NDS context.
NDS tree.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-17
Services
Parameters
Login Name
Description
Login name used to access the Fil-
ing location
Path to Document
(NetWare)
Directory Path (TCP/IP)
This is the location where files will
be transferred to on the server. For
Netware, this can include an abso-
lute or relative NDS Context (in
addition to a volume name and
directory path) if the path to where
the files are to be transferred is in a
different NDS Context than the
NDS Context of the Netware login.
Filing Policy
Defines how to store scanned out-
put files. Valid choices are Over-
write, Append, New Exact, New
Auto Generate.
Document Name
Defines the folder name for Single-
Page TIFF image files, or the name
of the image for PDF or Multi-Page
Tiff.
Output Image Format
(DC440/432/430/425)
Offers a choice of 3 formats - PDF,
TIFF or TIFF (Multi-page).
Suppress Job Log
This will cause the job log to “not be
transferred” with the scanned data/
files.
Fax
Immediate or Delayed
Send fax now or at a specific time.
Fax Recipients
Phone Number
Phone List
Where the fax is sent to.
Fax number of the recipient.
Add or delete fax numbers from the
Document Centre phone list.
Page 9-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Services
Parameters
Description
Print
Local
Copy
Number of Copies
Defines how many copies to print.
Staple (if Finisher option is Staples the printed output.
available)
Scan
Basic
Selects scanned input and output
document settings.
Original Type
Type of document that is being
scanned. Selections are:
Auto - the Document Centre auto-
matically determines the type of
input document.
Text - input documents that are pri-
marily composed of text, line art, or
solid areas.
Photo - input documents primarily
composed of photos.
Auto Exposure
Lighten/Darken
Sides Imaged
Resolution
Compensates for the low-density
quality of an original document and
produces an output image with a
background that is mostly white.
Adjusts the brightness of the
scanned images in relation to the
lightness or darkness of the original
paper document.
Selects the number of sides (single/
double-sided) to scan and how the
pages are scanned (Head to Head
or Head to Toe).
Selects the dots per inch.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-19
Services
Parameters
Sharpness
Description
Selects the sharpness and clarity of
the images on the document being
scanned.
Image Size
Sets the page dimensions for the
input and scanned document file.
Original Size
Select the dimensions of the input
document. The original size can be
detected as auto, pre-set or cus-
tom.
Stored Size
Set the dimensions of the output
document.
Same as Original (default) - auto-
matically creates an output image
which matches the dimensions of
the scanned document.
Pre-Set - specifies a standard sup-
ported size for the output docu-
ment.
Custom - specify a unique size for
the output document.
Page 9-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Services
Parameters
Reduce/Enlarge
Description
Sets reduction or enlargement.
Selections are:
Auto - automatically computes the
proper size of the scaled image so
that it can fit within the output docu-
ment dimensions without cropping.
Normal - enables the Scale Pre-
serving Aspect Ratio field which
enables reduction or enlargement
of an image proportionately. Type
the percent (50 - 200) required to
reduce or enlarge the image.
Custom - enables the Scale With-
out Preserving Aspect Ratio field
which enables reduction or enlarge-
ment of an image disproportion-
ately. Type the percent (50 - 200)
you wish to reduce or enlarge the
image.
Edge/Border Erase
Choose this setting to erase the
spots, punch holes, staple marks,
folds, or any other dark lines which
may appear around the edge of an
original document. You can erase
marks which appear in the outer 0
to 15 mm of the page.
Selections are:
Off - no marks will be erased.
Border Erase - enables you to
erase equal amounts of area on
each side of a page.
Edge Erase - enables you to erase
disproportionate areas on each side
of a page.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-21
Document Management Fields
The Document Management Fields feature allows users to
include variable programmable data with a job when it is being
scanned to a repository. The scanned job will be stored with
this information in the Job Log. The Job Log can then be
accessed by third party software and the Document
Management information retrieved with the scanned file.
The following describes the options available when creating a
template with Document Management Fields information:
Field Name: defines a name for the Document Management Fields data.
This value is not shown on the Document Centre touch screen.
The Field Name is used by the third party software to access
the Document Management Fields data. Up to 128 characters
can be entered. This option cannot be left blank.
Control Panel Prompt: defines the prompt message that is to be displayed to the user
at the Document Centre. Up to 50 characters can be entered
although only 25 characters will be displayed on the touch
screen. This option is displayed, but cannot be edited at the
touch screen.
Default Value: defines the actual data that is to be assigned to a particular
Control Panel Prompt. This value can contain any value,
including blanks and can be edited by the user at the machine.
Up to 128 characters can be entered although only 60 will be
displayed at the machine.
The Field Name, Control Panel Prompt and Default Value are
referred to as a single Document Management Fields entry. Up
to six entries can be programmed for each template.
NOTE: Contact the Xerox representative for more information
about the Third Party Software that can be used to access
image files referenced with Document Management Fields
data.
Page 9-22
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Template Operations
Once a System Administrator has defined the repositories and
default templates, the templates are available for use. Users
can access and modify templates within Stored Templates.
Refer to the following for information on creating, copying and
modifying a template.
NOTE: The default template cannot be deleted.
Creating a new template:
¾ Select [Stored Templates].
¾ Select [New]. The Default Template’s settings are used to
create the new template.
¾ Enter the template details.
¾ Select a service for the template.
NOTE: A File or Fax Service must be defined for a template.
¾ Select [Apply].
The new template appears in the left frame and is created with
the specified name.
¾ Select [Scan] and/or [Fax] and/or [File] as appropriate in
the template and apply any additional changes to the
template, which relate to the selected service and select
[Apply New Settings].
NOTE: Use the Add, Edit or Delete buttons to create, modify
or delete a Document Management Field entry.
Modifying a template:
¾ Select [Stored Templates].
¾ Select the required template.
¾ Select the service area to modify and make changes.
¾ Select [Apply New Settings].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-23
¾ To return the template to its last saved values, select
[Restore Settings].
NOTE: Use the Add, Edit or Delete buttons to create, modify
or delete a Document Management Field entry.
Copying a template:
¾ Select [Stored Templates].
¾ Select the required template.
¾ Select [Copy]. A copy of the template automatically
appears on the screen.
¾ Enter a new name for the template, an optional template
description and if required, the owner of the template.
¾ Select [Apply]. An exact copy of the original template (all
service parameters remain) with the new name will appear
in the left frame.
¾ Select this template and make any required changes.
NOTE: Use the Add, Edit or Delete buttons to create, modify
or delete a Document Management Field entry.
Deleting a template:
¾ Select [Stored Templates].
¾ Select the template that is to be deleted.
¾ Select [Delete]. The template is automatically deleted from
the left frame and the screen returns to the [Stored
Template] banner page.
Scan to File
Prior to scanning a document and creating an electronic file,
users must firstly set up the parameters for the job on a
template within Internet Services. The template can then be
Page 9-24
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
selected and the hard copy document scanned in at the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420. The scanned files are then
saved to either a public or private repository.
Scanning to a public repository:
¾ Create a scan template for Scan and File Services. Refer to
“Template Operations” on page 9-23 for information on
creating a template.
¾ Select the template. In the template’s File service, select
the pre-defined repository servers.
¾ Select the template at the Document Centre control panel.
¾ Scan the document at the Document Centre. The document
is scanned to the public repository.
To scan to a private repository:
¾ Create a scan template for Scan and File Services. Refer to
“Template Operations” on page 9-23 for information on
creating a template.
¾ Select a template and change the path to a private
repository by selecting Private as the Repository Type in the
template’s File Service and entering a new path.
¾ Select the template at the Document Centre control panel.
Enter the private repository password in Added Features,
Filing Setups, Login Name/Password.
¾ Scan the document at the Document Centre. The document
is scanned to the private repository.
Retrieving a Scanned Document using
PaperPort
NOTE: This feature is intended for use with CentreWare
4.1SP2 or earlier. It is not used when scanning using
CentreWare 5.1 or later.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-25
To edit an electronic file, first scan the document, then retrieve
it in a TIFF editing application, such as PaperPort.
¾ Create a scan template for Scan and File Services. Refer to
“Template Operations” on page 9-23 for information on
creating a template.
Or
¾ Select [Scan to PaperPort] in the Internet Services
template.
¾ Select the template at the Document Centre
¾ Scan the document. The document is scanned to the
repository.
¾ Access [PaperPort] and retrieve the scanned document file
within PaperPort.
HINT: For best results select Text in Original Type.
Page 9-26
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Scan to Fax
To save time when sending faxes, users can set up Scan to
Fax templates using Internet Services.
¾ Create a template for Fax Services. Refer to “Template
Operations” on page 9-23 for information on creating a
template.
¾ Enter the recipient’s fax number. A maximum of 100
characters can be entered.
NOTE: Select Add to add the number to the phone list or
highlight a number in the list and select Delete to remove the
number from the list.
¾ Select the fax template at the Document Centre.
¾ Scan the document. The document is faxed.
the Document Centre.
Scan with Local Copy
A hard copy document can be scanned and converted into
electronic format and printed.
¾ Create a template in Internet Services for File and Print with
Local Copy Services. Refer to “Template Operations” on
page 9-23 for information on creating a template.
¾ Select the features required for the template.
¾ Select the template at the Document Centre.
¾ Load the document and select [Start].
¾ The document is printed according to the Local Copy
settings in the template.
HINT: Templates that will Fax and Print Local Copy can be
selected using this feature.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 9-27
Problem Solving
Refer to the following questions if experiencing a problem
using Internet Services. For further assistance contact the
System Administrator.
¾ Are you using the correct browser version?
¾ Did you enter the correct IP address for the Document
Centre in the browser?
¾ Is the Document Centre filtered or blocked on the network?
¾ Is the Document Centre inside a firewall?
¾ Is the Document Centre configured for HTTP?
NOTE: If the network is experiencing connection performance
problems, do not use the proxy server.
Page 9-28
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
10 Paper and other media
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 is designed to use a variety
of types of paper and other media. This chapter offers
information about loading paper and other types of media into
the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 as well as recommending the
different types of paper and media that can be loaded in to the
various paper trays on the machine.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-1
Loading paper
When a paper tray is opened, the DC440/432/430/426/425/
420 assumes more paper is to be loaded. The touch screen
displays a pop-up window, giving the option to change the
paper and its attributes, or load more of the same paper.
Please refer to page 3-18 for more information about
programming the paper tray attributes.
Preparing paper for loading
Before loading paper into the paper trays, fan the edges. This
procedure separates any sheets of paper that are stuck
together and reduces the possibility of paper jams.
HINT: To avoid unnecessary paper jams and misfeeds do not
remove paper from its packaging until required.
Loading the paper trays
Depending on the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 configuration,
up to four paper trays will be available.
NOTE: If the machine is processing a job, do not open the
active paper tray.
Page 10-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Pull out the paper tray
towards you.
¾ The Tray Attributes window
will be displayed on the touch
screen.
HINT: To avoid jams and misfeeds do not load paper on top of
paper that may still be in the tray. Remove the paper, and
reload it on top of the new stock loaded.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-3
¾ If required, move the paper
tray guides to accommodate
the new paper size.
- To adjust the side guide, lift
the guide and slide the
guide to its new position. If
not positioned correctly the
guide will not slot into
place.
- To release the rear guide
push down on the tab and
slide the guide to its new
position. The tab will reset
once the guide is correctly
in place.
Rear guide
Side guide
¾ Make sure that the guides
lock tightly into place. If the
paper is not firmly against the
sides of the paper tray and
the guides, paper jams may
occur.
Page 10-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Referring to the tray labels,
load the paper neatly into the
tray. An arrow is imprinted in
the left-front corner of each
paper tray. Place one corner
of the stack of paper tightly
into the corner of the tray,
covering the arrow.
¾ Take care not to fill above the
maximum fill line.
¾ If the paper tray guides have
been moved, slide the guides
so that they are just touching
the paper loaded in the tray.
¾ Close the paper tray.
¾ Select [Confirm] in the Tray
Attributes window.
NOTE: If loading a different
paper type or color, reprogram
the features as required in
[Change Attributes].
NOTE: Although paper does not have to be loaded in the
same orientation as the documents, the DC440/432/430/426/
425/420 runs at a slightly slower speed when jobs require
rotation.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-5
Paper can be loaded either short edge feed or long edge feed,
however the default orientation is long edge feed.
Long Edge Feed (LEF)
NOTE: Mixing paper standards can lead to image loss.
The Bypass Tray
The Bypass Tray can be used for a variety of different media
stock. Refer to the table on page 10-13 for more information.
The Bypass Tray is located on the left hand side of the
machine. A tray extension, to accommodate larger paper, is
provided.
After loading media stock in the Bypass Tray the Change
Attributes pop-up window will be displayed on the touch
screen. Reprogram the paper type, size or color, to match the
stock loaded.
NOTE: To reduce unnecessary fuser and paper feed jams it is
important that the paper size, color and type programmed in
the Change Attributes window for the Bypass Tray is identical
to the paper stock loaded.
HINT: To ensure excellent performance when loading stock of
32lbs or heavier, it is recommended that the Heavyweight
option is selected as the Type in the Tray Attributes screen.
Page 10-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Bypass Tray with the Left Tray
¾ Following the copier labels,
load the paper neatly into the
bypass tray ensuring that the
paper stack is registered to
the front right hand corner.
Take care not to fill the tray
above the fill line.
¾ Slide the rear guide towards
the paper until it is just
touching the edge of the
stack.
Bypass Tray with the High Capacity Tray and
Finisher
¾ Slide the High Capacity
Feeder and Finisher unit
away from the machine.
¾ Load the Bypass Tray as
described on the previous
page.
¾ Slide the unit back to the
machine.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-7
HINT: If unwrapping a new packet of paper with the seam side
of the packet face up, turn the paper over when loading it in to
the Bypass Tray. This prevents curled output.
The Envelope Tray (optional)
The Envelope Tray only fits in the Tray 1 position. A maximum
of 70 envelopes of 24lb (substance 20) weight and any size
envelope between 6.5” x 3.9” and 10” x 7” can be loaded.
Mailing envelopes must be at least 4” wide and between 6” and
9.5” long. Reliable envelope sizes include 7 3/4”. Reliable
envelope styles include Standard Commercial.
NOTE: Envelopes must only be copied single-sided.
CAUTION:To prevent unnecessary damage to a tray after
it has been removed always make sure that it is placed or
stored on a smooth surface, for example a desk top.
NOTE: The Envelope Tray can only be inserted in place of
Tray 1.
Page 10-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Loading the Envelope Tray
¾ Pull open tray 1 and, holding
the tray on either side, gently
lift the tray and remove it from
the machine.
¾ Insert the envelope tray.
NOTE: When the envelope tray
is inserted, the touch screen
changes to display Envelope
Tray Attributes. Select Confirm
to accept the size shown or
select Change Envelope Size to
change the size.
¾ Adjust the guides in the tray
to accommodate the size of
the envelopes.
¾ Load large envelopes long
edge feed with the envelope
flap face down in the tray.
¾ Side flap envelopes should
be loaded with any folded
edges to the right.
¾ Place the envelopes in the
tray with the opening of the
envelope face down. For DL
wallet envelopes the flap
should be to the left.
NOTE: Make sure that the paper tray guides are just touching
the envelope stock loaded.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-9
The High Capacity Feeder (optional)
The High Capacity Feeder is an option on the DC440/432/430/
426/425/420. Although the High Capacity Feeder is designed
to accept 16 - 110lb (substance 16 - 110) paper, it can hold
2,000 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) 8 1/2” x 11” paper.
NOTE: To ensure maximum performance when loading stock
of 32lbs or heavier, it is recommended that the Heavyweight
option is selected as the Type in the Tray Attributes screen.
Loading the High Capacity Feeder:
¾ Use the handle on the front to
pull open the High Capacity
Feeder. The elevator in the
tray lowers.
¾ The Tray Attributes window
will be displayed on the touch
screen.
¾ Place the paper tightly
against the right hand side of
the tray.
¾ Close the High Capacity
Feeder. The elevator rises
and positions the paper for
use.
¾ Select [Confirm] in the Tray
Attributes window.
NOTE: If loading a different
paper type or color, reprogram
the features as required in
Change Attributes.
Page 10-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Auto Tray Switching
This feature has to be enabled on the machine. Contact the
Key Operator for further assistance.
Once enabled, if loading more than one tray with paper of the
same size and type, the DC440/432/430/426/425/420
automatically switches from one tray to the other, if the active
tray runs out of paper. This is called Auto Tray Switching.
However, the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 will not
automatically switch to a tray that contains a different size,
type, or color of paper.
HINT: On the DC440/432/430/425 the Bypass Tray can also
be used with Auto Tray Switching.
When not in use, the paper trays can be opened and paper can
be loaded while the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 is running.
However, do not open the active tray. This will cause the
machine to stop.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-11
Storing and Handling Paper
Always use high-quality, xerographic grade paper in the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420.
Damaged, curled, or damp paper can cause jams and image
quality problems. Follow these simple rules to store paper:
- Store paper in dry conditions, away from extreme heat or
cold, such as radiators or open windows.
- Store paper flat on a shelf or pallet above floor level.
- Leave the paper wrapped and boxed until ready to be
used.
- Re-wrap partly used packages of paper.
NOTE: Paper should not be stored in the paper trays.
Page 10-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Other media
A variety of media types can be used in the DC440/432/430/
426/425/420. Check the following table for special
considerations.
NOTE: Although 16-24lb (substance 16 - 24) bond paper is an
acceptable weight, the machine might experience a problem
with paper curl when feeding lightweight paper. Whenever
possible, use 20lb - 24lb (substance 20 - 24) bond paper.
Media Uses and Special Considerations
Media
4.13” x 5.83”
Use
Specifications
Postcards, small forms • Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: do not use
in these trays.
Postcard Paper
• Bypass Tray: load SEF
(postcards cannot be
NOTE: paper should
not be fed to the
duplexed). To print on both
sides, feed paper through
the Bypass Tray, then turn
the paper over and feed
through the Bypass Tray
again to print on the second
side.
Finisher or the Mailbox.
• High Capacity Feeder: do
not use in this tray.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-13
Media
5 1/2” x 8 1/2
Use
Specifications
Billing, account
statements
• Tray 1: load LEF, 500 sheets
maximum (20lb substance
20) paper.
Statement Paper
• Trays 2, 3, 4: do not use in
these trays.
• Bypass Tray: load LEF, 50
sheets maximum (20lb
substance 20) paper. When
printing from a workstation,
load paper SEF; when
making copies, load LEF.
8 1/2” x 11” Letter
Paper
Standard documents, • Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load SEF or
letters, forms
LEF, 500 sheets maximum
(20lb substance 20) paper.
• Bypass Tray: load SEF or
LEF, 50 sheets maximum
(20lb substance 20) paper.
(A4 SEF paper cannot be
fed from the bypass tray
when printing network jobs).
• High Capacity Feeder: load
LEF, 2000 sheets maximum
(20lb substance 20) paper.
8 1/2” x 11” Xerox
brand Recycled Paper
Standard documents
• Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load SEF or
LEF, 500 sheets maximum
(20lbsubstance 20) paper.
• Bypass Tray: load SEF or
LEF, 50 sheets maximum
(20lb substance 20) paper.
(8 1/2” x 11” SEF paper
cannot be fed from the
bypass tray when printing
network jobs)
• High Capacity Feeder: load
LEF, 2000 sheets maximum
(20lb substance 20) paper.
Page 10-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Media
Use
Specifications
8 1/2” x 14” Legal
Paper
Legal documents
• Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load SEF,
500 sheets maximum (20lb
substance 20) paper.
• Bypass Tray: load SEF,50
sheets maximum (20lb
substance 20) paper.
• High Capacity Feeder: do
not use in this tray.
11” x 17” (the DC440/ Over-sized or enlarged • Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load SEF,
432/430/425 requires documents, ledgers
64MB of memory
500 sheets (20lb substance
20) paper.
otherwise the machine
will not print on these
sizes)
• Bypass Tray: load SEF, 50
sheets (20lb substance 20)
paper.
• High Capacity Feeder: do
not use in this tray.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-15
Media
Use
Specifications
8 1/2” x 11” Drilled
Paper
3-, 4- and 7-ring
binders
• Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load LEF
with holes on the left (for
duplexing, load with the
holes on the right), 500
sheets maximum (20lb
substance 20) paper.
• Bypass Tray: load LEF with
the holes on the right (for
duplexing, load with the
holes on the left). Load SEF
with the holes facing the
back of the machine (for
duplexing, load with the
holes facing the front of the
machine) 50 sheets
maximum (20lb substance
20)paper.
• High Capacity Feeder: load
LEF with the holes on the
right (for duplexing, load with
the holes on the left), 2000
sheets maximum (20lb
substance 20) paper.
Preprinted paper,
Letterhead
Business communica- • Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load SEF or
tion, mailings and
LEF, face up (for duplexing,
load face down).
advertising materials
• Bypass Tray: load SEF or
LEF, face down (for
duplexing, load face up).
• High Capacity Feeder: load
LEF, face down, 2000 sheets
maximum (for duplexing,
load face up). Start with a
test run; use paper that has
preprinted materials from
ultraviolet cured or oxidative
inks whenever possible.
Page 10-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Media
Use
Specifications
Tabbed paper
Pages that have
extended tabs to sepa-
rate pages
• Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: do not use
in these trays.
• Bypass Tray: load a
maximum of 10 tabbed
sheets, LEF, with the tabs on
the outside.
• High Capacity Feeder: do
not use in this tray.
Envelopes
Refer to page 10-8 for
more information.
For mailings
• High Capacity Feeder,
Trays 1, 2, 3, 4 and Bypass
Tray: do not use in these
trays.
• Envelope Tray: (replaces
Tray 1) load with the opening
facing down.The gummed
edge should be on the trail
edge.
Inserts, colored stock Dividers
(standard size)
• Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load SEF or
LEF, 500 sheets maximum
(20lb substance 20)paper.
• Bypass Tray: load SEF or
LEF, 50 sheets maximum
(20lb substance 20)paper.
• High Capacity Feeder: load
LEF, seam side down
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-17
Media
Use
Specifications
8, 12, 16 and 24-up
Xerox labels (33-up
labels may not give
maximum
Self-adhesive labels for • Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load LEF or
envelopes and packag-
ing
SEF, face up.
• Bypass Tray: load LEF or
SEF, face down.
performance and are
not recommended)
• High Capacity Feeder: load
LEF, face down.
HINT: For maximum
performance it is recommended
that labels should only be
loaded into the paper trays
when required. On completion
of the job the labels should be
removed and replaced in the
box.
Card stock (typically
110lb substance 110) business cards
Covers, signs,
• Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: do not use
in these trays.
• Bypass Tray: load LEF or
SEF, face up. Maximum
performance may not be
achieved when feeding 90lb
-110lb/substance 90 - 110
SEF stock.
• High Capacity Feeder: load
LEF, face down.
NOTE: To ensure maximum
performance when loading
stock of 32lbsor heavier into
the Bypass Tray or High
Capacity Feeder, it is
recommended that the
Heavyweight option is selected
as the Type in the Tray
Attributes screen.
Page 10-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Media
Cover stock
Use
Specifications
Booklets
• Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load LEF or
SEF, face up.
• Bypass Tray: load LEF or
SEF, face down.
• High Capacity Feeder: load
LEF, face down.
Transparencies (clear, Presentations and
• Trays 1, 2, 3, 4: load LEF or
SEF with the removable strip
down and on the left.
removable strip and
paperbacked).
overhead projection
data
(Paperbacked
Paperbacked transparencies
should not be fed from these
trays.
transparencies can be
used but may not give
maximum
• Bypass Tray: load LEF or
SEF, paper or removable
strip up. Always feed
performance).
paperbacked transparencies
long edge feed only with the
glued edge as the feed
edge. No special instructions
for clear transparencies.
• High Capacity Feeder: load
LEF, paper and removable
strip up, with the glued edge
as lead edge. Always feed
paperbacked transparencies
long edge feed only with the
glued edge as the feed
edge. No special instructions
for clear transparencies.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 10-19
Page 10-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
11 Setups
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 is designed to enable
machine and feature default settings to be customized to meet
local requirements.
This chapter contains an explanation and step by step
instructions for customizing the various defaults available on
the machine, plus general information regarding the
procedures.
This chapter is for the Owner, Key Operator and System
Administrator of the machine.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-1
Setup Procedures
During manufacture, certain settings for features and functions
of the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 are programmed into the
machine. Once the machine is installed, the Setup Tools can
be used to change these settings to suit the user’s
environment.
Identification Number). Depending on the access rights
assigned to the PIN, any or all of the following tools can be
accessed to allow the various settings to be changed.
NOTE: It is recommended that Setups should not be
accessed until the machine has completed its power on
sequence.
For further information about assigning PINs, refer to “Access
Rights” on page 11-86.
Key Operator Tools
If a PIN is entered that has been assigned ‘Key Operator’
access rights, the user can set up or change the machine and
feature settings. These include some or all of the following,
dependent on machine configuration.
Machine Setups enable machine specific default settings to be changed or set
up, including paper tray defaults, machine date and time
For further information refer to “Machine Setups” on page 11-6.
Fault Override is used to disable a faulty component so that other components
and features may still be used.
For further information refer to “Fault Override” on page 11-19.
Copy Setups enable the Copy specific default settings to be changed or set
up.
Refer to “Copy Setups” on page 11-25 for further information.
Page 11-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Fax Setups enable the Fax specific default settings to be changed or set
up.
Refer to “Fax Setups” on page 11-34 for further information.
System Administrator Tools
If a PIN is entered that has been assigned ‘System
Administrator’ access rights, the user can set up or change the
settings for the Network Scanning, E-mail, Fax and Print
features.
Refer to “System Administrator Tools” on page 11-3 or the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 System Administration Guide for
further information.
Auditron Administrator Tools
If a PIN is entered that has been assigned ‘Auditron
Administrator’ access rights on the DC440/432/430/425, or
‘Owner’ access rights on the DC426/420, the user can set up
or change the Auditron settings.
restricts usage and/or access.
Refer to “Internal Auditron (DC440/432/430/425)” on page 11-
69 or “Internal Auditron (DC426/420)” on page 11-76 for further
information.
440/432/430/425) machines only. An external accounting system server is used
to store account data.
Refer to “Job Based Accounting (optional) (DC440/432/430/
425)” on page 11-82 for further information.
Foreign Interface Device refers to an external control device such as a coin-operated
device, a bill acceptor, a card reader, or a network controlled
tracking system installed on the system.
Refer to “Foreign Interface Device” on page 11-84 for further
information.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-3
Owner Tools
If a PIN is entered that has been assigned ‘Owner’ access
rights, the user can set up or change:
Access Rights the allocation of Key Operator, System Administrator, Auditron
Administrator (DC440/432/430/425) and Owner Access
Rights.
Refer to “Access Rights” on page 11-86 for further information.
Changing the Settings
Access the Setup Tools
When the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 is delivered, it
contains a default password (#22222) which can be used to
provide access to the Setup Tools prior to PINs and Access
Rights being assigned.
NOTE: #22222 is the default System Administrator password
on machine installation. It is recommended you change this
password. Please contact your Xerox Service Representative
for further assistance
Page 11-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Access]
on
the Control Panel.
¾ A pop-up window will be
displayed on the Touch
Screen.
¾ Select [#] on the Control
Panel and use the number
keypad to enter the default
password - 22222.
¾ Select [Enter] in the pop-up
window.
The following Screen is displayed and contains buttons for the
types of setups available.
¾ Select the button for the
setups to be changed.
NOTE: If necessary select
Additional Setups to access the
Setup feature required.
¾ Select [Save] or [Cancel].
¾ Select [Exit] to return to the
Walkup Screen.
For more information about Network Scanning and Print Setup
instructions, please refer to the DC440/432/430/426/425/420
System Administration Guide.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-5
Machine Setups
pages for more information:
Quick Pathway
¾Select
Paper Trays - page 11-8
[Access]
on the
Control Panel
Date/Time - page 11-9
¾Enter Key Operator
Walkup Screen - page 11-11
PIN - see NOTE
Timers - page 11-11
¾Select [Machine
Setups]
Contention - page 11-13
Report Languages - page 11-15
Touch Screen Contrast - page 11-16
Customer Support No. - page 11-16
Paper Sizes - page 11-17
Machine Serial Number - page 11-17
Xerox Supplies Number - page 11-18
Fault Override instructions are also included on page 11-19.
NOTE: These changes can only be made when a PIN
(Personal Identification Number) which has been assigned
Key Operator access rights is entered.
Page 11-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Access the Machine Setups
¾ Select [Access]
on
the Control Panel.
A pop-up window will be
displayed on the Touch Screen.
¾ Select [#] and use the
number keypad to enter a
Key Operator PIN - see
NOTE.
NOTE: The default password - #22222 - may be used if PINs
have not been assigned. Refer to “Access Rights” on page
11-86 for more information.
¾ Select [Enter] in the pop-up
window.
¾ Select [Machine Setups].
¾ The Machine Setups screen
is displayed.
NOTE: Additional Setups
accesses more Machine Setup
features. Select this button if
the feature required is not
displayed on the initial Machine
Setups screen.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-7
Paper Tray Setups
¾ Select [Paper Trays].
¾ Select any button to change
the setting - a description of
each follows.
¾ Make changes as required.
¾ Select [Save].
Default Tray Select the scroll buttons to select the paper supply default
setting - the list contains only the paper trays available with the
machine configuration. The chosen setting will be displayed
prior to other selections made by the user.
If Auto is selected as the default setting, the paper tray is
selected automatically to match the size and orientation of the
originals.
Tray Priority Select the order in which the machine searches the trays for
available media.
To change the settings, assign a priority to each tray. Number
1 is the highest priority and, depending on how many trays are
available, 4, 5, or 6 will represent the lowest priority, Each
number can only be assigned once.
NOTE: This feature is not available on single tray
configurations.
Auto Tray Switching Use the scroll buttons to select or de-select this feature. On
sets the machine to automatically switch to another paper tray
when the selected tray is out of paper. Another tray must
contain paper of the same size, type and orientation for
automatic switching to occur. To de-select this feature, select
Off.
Page 11-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Date/Time Setup
Date
¾ Select [Date/Time].
¾ Select [Date Setup].
¾ Select the scroll buttons to
select the preferred display
format, for example the mm-
dd-yy format would display
06-10-01 for a current date of
10th June 2001.
¾ Use the scroll buttons to
select the current month
(mm), day (dd) and year (yy).
NOTE: The current date is displayed on fax documents,
confirmation pages and activity reports. It is also displayed
when users select Annotation and Date for their copies.
¾ Select [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-9
Time
¾ Select [Time Setup].
¾ Select the preferred display
format, 12 or 24 Hour - for
example eleven o’clock at
night would either be
displayed as 11 or 23 hours.
¾ Use the scroll buttons to
select the current time in
hours and minutes.
¾ Select [Save] and [Close].
NOTE: The current time is displayed on fax documents,
confirmation pages and activity reports. It is also displayed
when users select Annotation and Time for their copies.
Page 11-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Walkup Screen
To change the default display
for the Touch Screen:
¾ Select [Walkup Screen].
¾ Select the preferred default
screen
¾ Select [Save].
The screen selected will be
displayed when the machine is
switched ON, when
programming or job time-out
occurs, or when Clear All is
selected.
NOTE: The buttons available will depend on the machine
configuration.
Timers
¾ Select [Timers].
¾ Select any button to change the setting - a description of
each follows.
¾ Make changes as required.
¾ Select [Save] to continue.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-11
Auto Clear
With the Auto Clear feature enabled, the machine returns to the
default settings after the specified time.
¾ Select [Auto Clear].
¾ Select [On] or [Off].
¾ If [On] is selected, use the
scroll buttons to set the
timeout period.
Low Power
Low Power Mode becomes active after the specified time of
machine non-use. When activated, the Touch Screen is blank
and the Power Saver light is on. When the Control Panel or
Touch Screen is selected, or the Platen cover lifted, the
machine responds within 1 second. All features are available
within 30 seconds.
¾ Select [Low Power].
¾ Use the scroll buttons to set
the timeout period.
NOTE: If the Low Power timeout is set higher than the timeout
for Power Save or Auto Off (depending on system
configuration), the machine displays a message that Low
Power cannot exceed Power Save (or Auto Off).
Page 11-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Power Save (Auto Off)
This function is dependant on the machine configuration.
Power Save/Sleep Mode (Auto 60 minutes after the last copy or print out, the machine will
Off/Sleep) automatically switch into Power Save/Sleep (Auto Off) Mode.
If the DC426/420 is not connected to a network, the machine
switches the Power ON/OFF switch to the off position. Any
stored jobs remain in the memory and the DC426/420 returns
to an operational condition when powered on.
¾ Select [Power Save] or
[Auto Off].
¾ Use the scroll buttons to
select the desired timeout
period.
¾ Select [Save].
NOTE: If Low Power is set higher than Power Save/Auto Off,
the machine displays a message that Low Power cannot
exceed Power Save/Auto Off.
Contention
Select Contention to set up Interrupt and/or the Print Queue
Priority option.
¾ Select [Contention].
¾ Select any button to change
the setting - a description of
each follows.
¾ Make changes as required.
¾ Select [Save] to continue.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-13
Interrupt Button
The Interrupt feature enables the current job to be stopped and
held in memory while another job is completed. When enabled
the Key Operator can set up Interrupt to function on completion
of the current set or the current page. When the Interrupt job is
complete, programming for the first job is retrieved by selecting
Interrupt again.
Interrupt on Set Boundary The machine will finish printing the current set.
Interrupt on Page Boundary The machine will finish printing the current page.
Priority or Print Queue Priority
Programs the machine to complete Print or Fax jobs in a
specified order. Number 3 is the highest priority, and number 5
is the lowest priority. Copy and Report jobs are always priority
3 - they have job priority over all other jobs. When print or fax
is set as priority 4, the machine automatically sets the other
feature as priority 5. Priority can only be changed for print and
fax jobs.
Localization
¾ Select [Localization].
¾ Select the preferred
measurement display format
- Inches or Millimeters.
¾ Select [Save].
Page 11-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Additional Setups
¾ If necessary, select
[Additional Setups].
¾ Select any button to change
the setting - a description of
each follows.
¾ Make changes as required.
¾ Select [Save].
Report Languages
Various language options can be made available for printed
reports. Please contact the Xerox representative for further
information.
NOTE: This option will not be available on Digital Copier
configurations.
¾ Select [Report Languages].
¾ Select the language to use
for printed reports.
¾ Select [Close].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-15
Touch Screen Contrast
¾ Select [Touch Screen
Contrast].
¾ Use the up/down arrows to
select a contrast level
between 1 and 254.
Alternatively, select the
display window to change the
setting using the pop-up
keypad. The factory default is
127.
¾ Select [Save].
Customer Support Number
When Machine Status is selected the machine displays the
Xerox customer support telephone number. Typically, the
correct number is entered by a Xerox representative when the
machine is first installed. If it is not on the screen, or if it is
incorrect, follow the instructions below to enter the correct
number.
NOTE: The number entered here will also be displayed within
the WebUI.
¾ Select [Customer Support
Number].
¾ Use the numeric keypad on
the screen to enter the Xerox
Customer Support telephone
number.
¾ Select [Save].
Page 11-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Paper Sizes
¾ Select [Paper Sizes].
¾ Select the preferred selection
of paper sizes.
¾ Select [Save].
Machine Serial Number
The machine displays the machine serial number when
Machine Status is selected. This number is required when
calling for customer support.
¾ Select [Machine Serial
Number].
¾ Use the keypad on the screen
to enter the Machine Serial
number - if necessary select
More Characters to display
an alternative keypad.
¾ Select [Save].
HINT: The Machine serial number is located inside the Left
Front Cover of the machine under the Copy/Print Cartridge.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-17
Xerox Supplies Number / Supplies Tel. Number
The machine displays the Xerox supplies telephone number
when Machine Status is selected.
NOTE: The number entered here will also be displayed within
the WebUI.
¾ Select [Xerox Supplies
Number] or [Supplies Tel.
Number].
¾ Use the numeric keypad on
the screen to enter the Xerox
Supplies telephone number.
¾ Select [Save] and [Close].
¾ Select another Setup or
select [Exit] to exit the setup
screens.
Page 11-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Fault Override
When a fault occurs on the DC440/432/430/426/425/420, the
Touch Screen displays step-by-step instructions for the walkup
user to clear the fault. The instructions include contacting the
Key Operator if the fault cannot be cleared.
In this instance the Key Operator can enter their PIN to access
the Fault Override screen and disable the faulty component.
After the component is disabled, all features will be available
except those that require the disabled component.
Use Fault Override only if all other attempts to clear the fault
have failed. Entering Fault Override Mode might require action
to disable the faulted component, delete the faulted job, or
both, depending on the type of job and fault.
NOTE: Use caution when deleting a remote job - it may not be
possible to re-create or resubmit the job.
Accessing Fault Override
To access Fault Override Mode, a fault screen must currently
be displayed on the Touch Screen.
¾ Select [Access]
¾ Select [#] and enter a PIN (Personal identification Number)
with Key Operator access rights - see NOTE below.
¾ Select [Confirm] to delete the current job and or disable the
faulty component.
NOTE: The default password - #22222 - may be used if PINs
have not been assigned. Refer to “Access Rights” on page 11-
86 for more information.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-19
Unavailable Features
Some types of jobs will not print if the disabled component is
required for a default setup. In this case, the machine displays
a prompt to check the setups.
The following table contains details about specific features that
are unavailable when a component is disabled.
Service/
Disabled Component
Disabled Feature/Result
Feature
Document Feeder
Copy
2 Up, Booklet Creation, Sides Imaged 2
Æ1 or 2 Æ 2, or Mixed Size Originals in
the DADF.
Document Feeder
Document Feeder
Duplex Module
Fax
Sides Scanned
Network Scanning
Copy
Sides Imaged
Booklet Creation, Sides Imaged 1Æ2 or
2 Æ2
Duplex Module
Copy Setups, Sides
Imaged, 1Æ2 Sided or
The machine will not print copy jobs if
Duplex is disabled and Sides Imaged
1Æ2 or 2Æ2 are the default settings. The
Sides Imaged button will not be
2Æ2
Sided
displayed on the Touch Screen.
Duplex Module
In Fax Setups, Embedded The machine will not print fax jobs if the
Fax (if both Fax options
are enabled), Terminal
Setups, Fax Printing
Duplex Module is disabled and if the
default settings are Duplex Printing: All 2
Sided or 1,2,2...
Options, Duplex Printing:
All 2 Sided and 1,2,2...
Duplex Module
Duplex Module
In Print Setups, Printer
Setups, Job Settings,
Sides Printed, Duplex
The machine will not print jobs if the
Duplex Module is disabled and the
default is Sides Printed, Duplex.
Network
Double-sided printing.
Page 11-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Service/
Feature
Disabled Component
Disabled Feature/Result
Editing Kit
Finisher
Copy
Editing.
In Fax Setups, Embedded The machine will not print Fax jobs if the
Fax (if both Fax options
are enabled), Fax
Finisher is disabled and the default is
Stapled.
Terminal Setups, Fax
Printing Options, Output
Selection, Left, Stapled
Finisher
Finisher
In Fax Setups, Server Fax If stapled is selected and the Finisher is
Setups, Output Tray
Options
not installed, Server Fax prints are sent
to the Left Tray
In Fax Setups, Embedded The machine will not print Fax jobs if the
Fax (if both Fax options
are enabled), Fax
Finisher is disabled and the default is the
Left Tray.
Terminal Setups, Fax
Printing Options, Output
Selection, Left Tray
Finisher
Finisher
In Print Setups, Printer
Setups, Tray Settings,
Destination Tray, Left Tray Left Tray.
The machine will not print Print jobs if the
Finisher is disabled and the default is the
In Copy Setups, Output, The machine will not print Copy jobs if
Stapled
the Stapler is disabled and also is the
default. The Output button will not be
displayed on the Copy screen.
Finisher
Finisher
In Fax Setups, Fax
Terminal Setups, Fax
Printing Options, Output output is the Left Tray.
Selection, Left Tray
The machine will not print Fax jobs if the
Finisher is disabled and the default
In Print Setups, Printer
Setups, Tray Settings,
The machine will not print Print jobs if the
Finisher is disabled and the default is the
Destination Tray, Left Tray Left Tray.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-21
Service/
Feature
Disabled Component
Disabled Feature/Result
Finisher
In Copy Setups, Output, The machine will not print Copy jobs if
Collated Left Tray and
Copy Setups, Output,
Uncollated Left Tray
the Finisher is disabled and the default
output is the Left Tray. The Output button
will not be displayed on the Copy screen.
Finisher and Stapler
In Copy Setups, Output, The machine will not print Copy jobs if
Stapled
Stapled is disabled and also is the
default output. The Output button will not
be displayed on the Copy screen.
Foreign Interface Device In the Copy feature with
The Copy feature is disabled.
Foreign Interface Device
Foreign Interface Device In the Copy feature with
The Copy feature is enabled only for
Foreign Interface Device Internal Auditron Control.
and Internal Auditron
Control
Foreign Interface Device In Setups, Auditron
For Copy with a Foreign Interface
Setups, External Control Device, the machine will not copy if
Device, Per-Page Control, Foreign Interface Device is disabled and
or Monitor with or without External Control Device is selected.
limits
For Copy with Foreign Interface Device
and Internal Auditron Control, Copy is
enabled only for Internal Auditron
Control.
Foreign Interface Device In the Copy feature with
The Copy feature is disabled.
Foreign Interface Device
High Capacity Feeder
High Capacity Feeder
Copy
High Capacity Tray
The High Capacity Feeder The machine will not print Copy or Fax
jobs if the disabled tray is the default
tray. The Paper Supply button will not be
displayed on the Copy screen.
Page 11-22
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Service/
Feature
Disabled Component
Disabled Feature/Result
Print Engine
In Scan Setups, Filing
Setups, Proof Before
Send
Proof Before Sending might be enabled
in some Network Scanning templates.
The Proof Before Send job will be
pending in the Print Queue until the print
engine fault is cleared and printing is
resumed.
Print Queue
Tower Mailbox
Paper Tray 1
Paper Tray 2
Paper Tray 3
Paper Tray 4
Print
Network/Print Controller jobs are
temporarily removed from the Print
Queue. When the fault is cleared, the
machine attempts to recover the jobs.
In Print Setups, Printer
Setups, Tray Settings,
Destination Tray, Tower default is any Bin 1–10.
Mailbox, Bins 1–10
The machine will not print Print jobs if the
Tower Mailbox is disabled and the
In Machine setups, Paper The machine will not print Copy or Fax
Trays, Default Tray
jobs if the disabled tray is the default
tray. The Paper Supply button will not be
displayed on the Copy screen.
In Machine Setups, Paper The machine will not print Copy or Fax
Trays, Default Tray
jobs if the disabled tray is the default
tray. The Paper Supply button will not be
displayed on the Copy screen.
In Machine Setups, Paper The machine will not print Copy or Fax
Trays, Default Tray
jobs if the disabled tray is the default
tray. The Paper Supply button will not be
displayed on the Copy screen.
In Machine Setups, Paper The machine will not print Copy or Fax
Trays, Default Tray
jobs if the disabled tray is the default
tray. The Paper Supply button will not be
displayed on the Copy screen.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-23
Service/
Feature
Disabled Component
Disabled Feature/Result
Page 11-24
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Copy Setups
Refer to the following pages for the procedures for Copy
the following features:
Quick Pathway
¾Select
Reduce/Enlarge - page 11-26
[Access]
onthe
Control Panel
Image Quality - page 11-28
¾Enter Key Operator
Output - page 11-29
PIN - see NOTE
Sides Imaged - page 11-29
¾Select [Copy Setups].
Expert Image Quality - page 11-31
Margin Shift (DC440/432/430/425) - page 11-31
Erase (DC440/432/430/425) - page 11-32
NOTE: These changes can only be made when a PIN
(Personal Identification Number) which has been assigned
Key Operator access rights is entered. The default password
is #22222 which may be used if PINs have not yet been
assigned.
Access the Copy Setups
¾ Select [Access]
on
the Control Panel.
A pop-up window will be
displayed on the Touch Screen.
¾ Select [#] on the Control
Panel and use the number
keypad to enter a Key
Operator PIN.
¾ Select [Enter] in the pop-up
window.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-25
¾ Select [Copy Setups].
Reduce/Enlarge
¾ Select [Reduce/Enlarge].
Defaults
¾ Select [Defaults].
¾ Use the arrow buttons to
select the default
magnification setting.
The default magnification will
automatically be selected when
the machine is switched ON,
when programming or job
timeout occurs, or when Clear
All is selected.
Page 11-26
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Normal
When users select Normal in the Reduce/Enlarge column on
the Touch Screen, a selection of preset sizes is displayed. The
default value of these presets can be customized to meet local
requirements. The factory default presets are:
1. 100%
2. 8 1/2” x 5 1/2” through 8 1/2” x 14”
3. 8 1/2” x 11” through 11” x 17”
4. 8 1/2” x 14” through 8 1/2” x 11”
5. 11” x 17” through 8 1/2” x 11”
¾ Select [Normal].
¾ Use the arrow buttons to
select a value for each
magnification preset.
Custom
The Custom settings are used to reduce or enlarge non-
standard document sizes onto standard paper. X and Y values
are selected from a range of 25% to 400%
¾ Select [Custom].
¾ Use the scroll buttons to
select a value for X and Y.
¾ Select [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-27
Image Quality
¾ Select [Image Quality].
¾ Use the scroll buttons to
select the [Original Type]
according to the document
type used most frequently.
See below for an explanation
of each.
¾ Set the default level of
darkness or lightness
required for each original
type.
¾ Select [Save].
Text for documents that contain line art and low-quality halftones.
Colored backgrounds are automatically suppressed. This is
the factory default.
Auto for documents that contain text, photo, and graphic
combinations. Colored backgrounds are automatically
suppressed and line edges and text sharpened.
Photo for documents that contain photographs. This setting identifies
the use of black, white, and halftones to focus on the photo
image and make a clear copy.
Page 11-28
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Output
¾ Select [Output].
¾ Use the scroll buttons to
select the default output
option required - Stapled,
Uncollated Left Tray, Collated
Left Tray, Uncollated Center
Tray or Collated Center Tray.
NOTE: The options available
will be dependent on the
machine configuration.
The factory default is Collated
Center Tray.
¾ Select [Save].
HINT: Typically, the Center Tray is used for copy output, and
the Left Tray is used for fax output.
Sides Imaged
¾ Select [Sides Image].
¾ Select the preferred default
options - see below for an
explanation.
¾ Select [Save].
NOTE: The options available
will be dependent on the
machine configuration.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-29
1
2
1
2
1 Sided single-sided copies from single-sided originals.
1 Sided single-sided copies from double-sided originals.
2 Sided double-sided copies from single-sided originals.
2 Sided double-sided copies from double-sided originals.
For 2 Sided options, also select the orientation:
Head to Head the top of the document on each side is at the top of the page.
This is the factory default setting.
Head to Toe the image on the second side of each page is rotated 180°;
therefore, the top of the document on the second side is at the
bottom of the page.
Portrait or Landscape If available, select either Portrait or Landscape.
The following illustration depicts the results for Head to Head
or Head to Toe selections for Portrait and Landscape images.
Portrait Images
Landscape Images.
Head to Head
for binding on the long edge
Head to Head
for binding on the short edge
A
B
A
B
Head to Toe
Head to Toe
for binding on the short edge for binding on the long edge
A
A
B
B
Page 11-30
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Expert Image Quality
¾ Select [Expert Image
Quality].
¾ Select the default required - a
description of each follows.
¾ Select [Save].
Sharpness adjusts the sharpness of the image - select the preferred
setting.
Grayscale Copying (DC426/ provides improved reproduction of gray levels - select On or
420) Off.
Auto Exposure select a default setting of On to enhance documents with
colored backgrounds or Off to disable this feature.
Margin Shift (DC440/432/430/425)
Programs the default amount of Margin Shift to move the
image up/down or side to side on one or both sides of a page.
Margin Shift can be applied to side one and side two of a page.
¾ Select [Margin Shift].
¾ Select [Side 1] or [Side 2] to
change the setting or [Off] to
disable this feature.
¾ If Side 2 shift is selected,
select [Independent] and the
settings or [Mirror] to mirror
the side 1 settings.
¾ Select [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-31
Erase (DC440/432/430/425)
Programs the default settings for the Edge Erase and Border
Erase features. The factory default is off for all the erase
features with the erase values set to 0 inches.
¾ If necessary, select
[Additional Setups].
¾ Select [Erase].
¾ Select [Border Erase] or
[Edge Erase] to change the
settings - a description of
each follows - or select [Off]
to turn this feature off.
¾ Make changes as required.
¾ Select [Save].
Border Erase (DC440/432/430/425)
¾ Select [Border Erase].
¾ Use the scroll buttons to set
the default measurement for
Border Erase between 0 and
2 in.
¾ Select [Save].
Page 11-32
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Fax Setups
On the DC440/432/430/425 both Server Fax and Embedded
Fax can be installed on the Document Centre, but only one
service can be enabled at any one time. If both are installed
they must be configured separately.
Quick Pathway
¾Select
[Access]
on the
Control Panel
NOTE: Which ever option has been enabled, the Fax tab will
retain the same name.
¾Enter Key Operator
PIN - see NOTE below
¾Select [Fax Setups]
NOTE: Only Embedded Fax can be installed on the DC426/
420
¾Select the option
required.
For more information about Embedded Fax Setups please
refer to Embedded Fax Setups - page 11-37
Access the Fax Setups
¾ Select [Access]
on
the Control Panel.
A pop-up window will be
displayed on the Touch Screen.
¾ Select [#] on the Control
Panel and use the number
keypad to enter a Key
Operator PIN - see NOTE
opposite.
NOTE: These changes can only be made when a PIN
(Personal Identification Number) which has been
assigned Key Operator access rights is entered. The
default password is #22222 which may be used if PINs
have not yet been assigned.
¾ Select [Enter] in the pop-up
window.
Page 11-34
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Fax Setups].
NOTE: If only Server Fax or
Embedded Fax is installed, on
selection of Fax Setups the
relevant setup screen will
automatically be displayed.
¾ If necessary, select the Fax
option required.
NOTE: This screen will only be
displayed if both Embedded
Fax and Server Fax are
installed on the machine.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-35
Server Fax Setups (DC440/432/430/425)
Once Server Fax has been installed on the DC440/432/430/
426/425/420 it will need to be enabled and the filing
repositories set up within the required network configuration.
Quick Pathway
¾Select
Please refer to the System Administration Guide or contact
your System Administrator for further assistance.
[Access]
on the
Control Panel
¾Enter Key Operator
PIN.
¾Select [Fax Setups]
¾If both Embedded and
Server Fax are
installedselect[Server
Fax].
¾Select Enable/Disable.
Enable/Disable disables or enabled Server Fax.
Confirmation Report confirms whether the fax has been successfully scanned and
filed to the 3rd Party Fax Server.
Output Tray Options use to select the output tray for faxes printed by the Fax
Server.
Network Setups offers the Netware or TCP/IP network options.
Page 11-36
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Embedded Fax
Refer to the following pages for the procedures for changing
the default Embedded Fax features. Embedded Fax Setups is
divided into two areas:
- Fax Terminal Setups: to set and change the defaults for
the available fax options such as paper size and type,
resolution, and mailbox options.
- Fax Communication Setups: to set options that affect
Fax Terminal Setups
This section contains the procedures for the following Fax
Terminal Setups:
Quick Pathway
Fax Terminal Setups - page 11-37
Fax Printing Options - page 11-44
Fax Report Options - page 11-47
Fax Panel Defaults - page 11-50
Fax Mailboxes - page 11-53
¾Select
[Access]
Control Panel
onthe
¾Enter the Key Operator
PIN.
¾Select [Fax Setups].
Fax File Management - page 11-55
¾Select [Fax Terminal
Setups].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-37
Access Fax Terminal Setups
Fax Terminal Options
¾ Select [Fax Terminal
Options].
¾ Select any button to change
the setting - a description of
each follows.
¾ Make changes as required.
¾ Select [Save].
NOTE: Only those selections relevant to the machine
configuration will be available.
Local ID
According to the Federal Law, the DC440/432/430/426/425/
420 must be programmed with an identification number. The
identification number, or Local ID, is the telephone number for
the machine.
If the identification number has not been programmed, the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 displays a pop-up message
instructing users to enter the ID number before completing
their jobs. To ensure that this law is adhered to, the DC440/
432/430/426/425/420 will not continue until the number is
entered. Entering the Local ID number is only required on the
first occasion the machine is used.
Page 11-38
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Local ID].
If more than 1 line is connected,
select the line to set the local ID.
¾ Enter the telephone number
of the DC440/432/430/426/
425/420 using the keypad on
the screen (up to 20
characters including spaces).
¾ Select [Save].
Local Name
The Local Name is the name allocated to this particular
machine. For example, it could indicate the location of the
machine - for example, ‘Copier West’, or be the Company
name.
¾ Select [Local Name].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-39
¾ Select the second [Local
Name] on the right of the
screen.
¾ Use the keypad on the
screen to enter the Local
Name of the DC440/432/430/
426/425/420 (up to 20
characters including spaces).
¾ Select [Save].
Company Logo
Company Logo is used to identify the organization sending the
fax in the header of the transmission report and in the cover
letter for fax documents.
¾ Select [Company Logo].
Page 11-40
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select the second [Company
Logo] on the right of the
screen.
¾ Use the keypad on the
screen to enter the Company
Logo (up to 30 characters
including spaces).
¾ Select [Save].
HINT: Select Change Keyboard to display
additional characters.
Delayed Start Time
Users can scan a document and delay its transmission start
time. If they do not specify the delayed start time, the machine
uses the default delayed start time that is entered here.
¾ Select [Delayed Start Time].
¾ Select the second [Delayed
Start Time] on the right of the
screen.
¾ Use the scroll buttons on the
screen to select the default
transmission start time.
¾ Select [Save] to continue.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-41
Long Document (DC440/432/430/425)
This feature allows the Key Operator to set up the machine to
scan and send fax documents that are longer than 16.5”.
¾ Select [Long Document].
¾ Select [600 mm] or
[3600 mm] to enable
scanning of long documents
up to these lengths.
¾ Select [Save].
Page 11-42
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Dialling Digits Reporting (DC440/432/430/425)
This default selects whether the first or the last 20 digits of a
telephone number are displayed on reports and headers.
¾ Select [Dialling Digits
Reporting].
¾ Select the preferred option.
¾ Select [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-43
Fax Printing Options
¾ Access Fax Terminal Setups as described on “Fax Terminal
Setups” on page 11-37.
¾ Select [Fax Printing Options].
Receive Reduction
With this feature enabled, the DC440/432/430/426/425/420
automatically determines the required reduce/enlarge ratio for
printing on the selected paper.
¾ Select [Receive Reduction].
¾ Select [Auto] or [Off] as
required.
Page Margin
This feature defines the maximum amount of space between
the length of an incoming fax and the length of the paper on
which the fax is to be printed. The Page Margin setting affects
the bottom of the page. It avoids image loss if users are printing
onto a smaller size paper.
¾ Select [Page Margin].
¾ Use the scroll buttons to
select the required margin.
Page 11-44
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Duplex Printing
This feature sets the default 2-sided printing setting for
incoming fax documents and reports.
NOTE: Duplex Printing features will depend on product
configuration.
¾ Select [Duplex Printing].
¾ Make selections as required -
see below. All 1 Sided is the
factory default.
For DC426/425/420 duplex
options, also select either
Portrait or Landscape output
and whether printing should be
Head to Head or Head to Toe.
All 1 Sided: prints fax documents and reports single-sided.
All 2 Sided: prints fax documents and reports double-sided.
1, 2, 2... prints fax documents with the first page single-sided and the
rest of the pages double-sided. Reports are printed all double-
sided.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-45
Paper Attributes
Programs the default types, colors and sizes of paper on which
fax documents and reports can be printed.
¾ Select [Paper Attributes].
¾ Select the buttons on the
right of the screen to select
the types, colors and sizes of
paper on which incoming fax
documents and reports will
be printed - more than one
type can be selected.
¾ Select [Save].
Output Selection
Programs the output tray for incoming fax documents.
NOTE: Output Selection features will depend on product
configuration.
¾ Select [Output Selection].
¾ Select the default output
option required - the available
options are dependent on
product configuration.
HINT: Typically, the Left Tray is the default fax tray; the Center
Tray is the default copy tray. If a Finisher is installed, the
options will include Finisher/Stapled.
Page 11-46
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
A3 Æ 11" x 17" (DC440/432/430/425)
Programs incoming fax documents to be printed on a different
size paper. For example, an incoming A3 size (European
standard) fax can be trimmed to print on 11" x 17" paper.
Alternatively, choose to have the machine reduce the image to
fit.
¾ Select [A3 Æ 11” x 17”].
¾ Select the option required.
Fax Report Options
¾ Access Fax Terminal Setups as described on “Fax Terminal
Setups” on page 11-37.
¾ Select [Fax Report Options].
Activity Report
Programs the machine to automatically print a report of phone
line activity.
¾ Select [Activity Report].
¾ Select the default option
required - see description
below. [Auto Print] is the
factory default.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-47
Auto Print prints an Activity Report when the number of outgoing and
incoming calls reaches 50. Only calls that were not printed on
the last report are included.
On Demand prints an Activity Report only when it is manually selected.
Only calls that were not printed on the last report are included.
Broadcast and Multi-Poll Reports
Programs the machine to print a report of each broadcast send
and multi-polling operation to multiple remote machines. When
a fax is sent to one fax number, the machine prints a
Transmission Report. When a fax is sent to, or polled from, a
group of numbers, the machine prints one Broadcast and Multi-
Poll Report, which lists all of the numbers in the group.
¾ Select [Broadcast and
Multi-Poll Reports].
¾ Select [Auto Print] to have
this report print automatically
or [Off] to turn the feature off.
[Auto Print] is the factory
default.
Page 11-48
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Transmission Report
Programs the machine to print the status of each transmission
and displays a reduced image of the first page of the original
document after each transmission is completed.
¾ Select [Transmission
Report].
¾ Select the option required -
- [Always Print]
automatically prints a
report for each outgoing
fax.
- [Print on Error Only]
prints a report only when a
transmission error occurs.
- [Off] turns this feature off.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-49
Mailbox Report
Programs the machine to automatically print a report informing
the mailbox owner each time a fax is received.
¾ Select [Mailbox Report].
¾ Select the default option
required.
¾ Select [Save].
Fax Panel Defaults
¾ Access Fax Terminal Setups as described on “Fax Terminal
Setups” on page 11-37.
¾ Select [Fax Panel Defaults].
Resolution
Sets one of three resolutions as the default setting for outgoing
fax documents. The default selected depends on the types of
documents users send most often.
¾ Select [Resolution].
¾ Select the default option
required - a description of
each follow.
Page 11-50
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Standard (200 x 100) reduces communication time - use for text documents.
Fine (200 x 200) combines the features of standard and super fine resolution -
.
use for most fax documents and for black and white graphics
Super Fine (400 x 400) improves image quality and rendition - use for photos,
halftones and images with grey tones.
Lighter/Darker
¾ Select [Lighter/Darker].
¾ Use the scroll buttons to
select the default option
required.
Original Type
¾ Select [Original Type].
¾ Select the default option
required - a description of
each follows.
Auto separates images into text and photo areas automatically, and
implements image processing for each area.
Text optimizes image processing for text, lines, and solid areas.
Photo optimizes image processing for photographs.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-51
Forced 4800 (DC426/420)
Used when fax communications are susceptible to errors. This
mode is slower, but less susceptible to errors.
¾ Select [Forced 4800].
¾ Select [On] or [Off] as the
default.
¾ Select [Save].
Communication Mode (DC440/432/430/425)
This feature sets the default communication mode to be used
for transmission to a remote fax machine.
¾ Select [Communications
Mode].
¾ Select the default option
required - a description of
each follows.
¾ Select [Save].
Super G3 automatically determines the communication mode to be used
based on the maximum capabilities of the remote fax machine.
This mode minimizes the data transmission errors by using
Error Correction Mode (ECM). Initial communication speed is
33,600 Bits Per Second (bps).
The speed can also be selected manually. The lower the
speed, the less chance errors will occur during transmission.
The Kilo Bits Per Second (Kbps) speeds available are 33.6,
31.2, 28.8, 24.0, 21.6, 19.2 and 16.8.
Page 11-52
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
G3 like Super G3, this setting automatically determines the
communication mode to be used based on the maximum
capabilities of the remote fax machine, but initial
communication speed is 14,400 bps. ECM is also used with
this option.
The speed can also be selected manually. The lower the
speed, the less chance errors will occur during transmission.
The speeds available are 14.4Kbps, 12.0Kbps, 9600 bps and
7200 bps.
Forced 4800 bps used when fax communications are susceptible to errors. This
mode is slower, but less susceptible to errors.
NOTE: In some regional areas, the use of the Communication
Mode feature is restricted.
Fax Mailboxes
Fax Mailboxes are used to electronically store confidential
incoming fax documents for retrieval and print at a convenient
time. Use this option to create, assign, modify, and delete
electronic fax mailboxes. A maximum of 200 mailboxes are
available.
¾ Select [Fax Mailboxes].
¾ Select a mailbox in the list to
select it. Select the scroll
buttons to move up and down
the list.
¾ Follow the instructions below
to delete, edit or add a
mailbox.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-53
To Add or Edit a Mailbox
¾ In the Mailbox List, select a
mailbox to select it. To add a
new mailbox, select an empty
mailbox.
¾ Select [Edit Mailbox].
¾ Select [Mailbox Password].
¾ Use the keypad on the
Control Panel to enter a four-
digit password (0000-9999).
¾ Select [Save].
¾ Select [Mailbox Name].
¾ Use the keypad on the Touch
Screen to enter a name of up
to 10 characters.
¾ Select [Save].
¾ Select [Next Mailbox] to
program another mailbox.
Select [Previous Mailbox] to
return to a previous mailbox.
HINT: Select Change Keyboard to access
additional characters.
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Close].
Page 11-54
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
To Delete a Mailbox
¾ Select [Delete Mailbox].
¾ Select [Confirm] to delete
the selected mailbox and its
contents.
Fax File Management
¾ Access Fax Terminal Setups as described on “Fax Terminal
Setups” on page 11-37.
¾ Select [Fax File Management].
¾ Select any button to change
the setting - a description of
each follows.
¾ Make changes as required.
¾ Select [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-55
Mailbox Files (DC440/432/430/425)/Failed Fax
Files (DC426/420)
Displays a list of fax jobs that were unsuccessful after
attempting to send the job a specified number of times
depending on current settings.
¾ On the DC440/432/430/425
select [Mailbox Files]. (On
the DC426/420 select [Failed
Fax Files]).
¾ Select the required default
setting.
Refer to the following descriptions for more information.
Auto Delete automatically deletes all failed fax documents.
Delete in 24 hours (DC426/420) automatically deletes all failed fax documents after 24 hours.
Keep keeps all failed fax documents until they are manually deleted.
Files for Polling (DC440/432/430/425)
Contains data for documents scanned and stored in memory in
order to send them to a remote terminal when polled.
On the DC426/420 this feature is known as Files Stored for
Polling.
Refer to the following description for more information.
Page 11-56
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Files for Polling].
¾ Select the required default
setting - a description of each
follows.
¾ Select [Save]. Select
[Close].
transmitted.
they are manually deleted.
Fax Communication Setups
This section contains the procedures to set the following:
Outgoing Fax Options - page 11-58
Quick Pathway
¾Select
Incoming Fax Options - page 11-63
[Access]
on the
Line Use Restriction - page 11-66
Control Panel
¾Enter the Key Operator
PIN.
¾Select [Fax Setups]
¾Select [Fax
Communication
Setups].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-57
Access Fax Communication Setups
¾ Select [Fax Setups].
¾ Select [Fax Communication
Setups].
NOTE: Only those selections relevant to the product
configuration will be available.
Outgoing Fax Options.
¾ Select [Outgoing Fax
Options].
¾ Select any button to change
the setting - a description of
each follows.
¾ Make changes as required.
¾ Select [Save].
Dialing Type
This setting programs a tone or pulse dialing.
NOTE: This feature is restricted in some areas.
- Tone
- 10 PPS (pulse per second): for a rotary dial.
- 20 PPS (pulse per second): for a rotary dial.
Page 11-58
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Dialing Type].
¾ If necessary, select [Line 1]
or [Line 2].
¾ Select the desired option.
¾ Select [Save].
Pause Time
This feature sets the amount of time for dial pauses.
¾ Select [Pause Time].
¾ Select the scroll buttons to
select a pause time in
seconds.
Redial Management
Redial Count sets the number of times the machine will automatically
attempt a redial if a connection cannot be made.
Redial Interval sets the time intervals in minutes between redials.
NOTE: This feature is restricted in some areas.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-59
¾ Select [Redial
Management].
¾ Select [Redial Count].
¾ Select the scroll buttons to
select the number of redial
attempts.
¾ Select [Save].
¾ Select [Redial Interval].
¾ Select the scroll buttons to
select the elapsed time in
minutes between redials.
¾ Select [Save].
Page 11-60
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Line Monitor
Line Monitor audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker
until a connection is made. After connection, the line monitor is
removed.
¾ Select [Line Monitor].
¾ Select [On] to enable this
feature or [Off] to switch this
feature off.
¾ Select [Save] to continue.
Line Monitor Volume sets a default volume for line monitoring as High, Normal, or
Low.
¾ If [Line Monitor] is set to
[On], select [Line Monitor
Volume].
¾ Select the volume setting
required.
¾ Select [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-61
Batch Send
Transmits several pending documents to one destination
during a single phone call.
¾ Select [Batch Send].
¾ Select [On] to enable this
feature or [Off] to switch this
feature off.
Resend Count
Sets the number of attempts that can be made to automatically
re-transmit a failed page if a page error occurs.
¾ Select [Resend Count].
¾ Select the number of
attempts the machine should
make to send a failed page.
¾ Select [Save].
Page 11-62
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Incoming Fax Options
¾ Access Fax Communication Setups as described on “Fax
Communication Setups” on page 11-57.
¾ Select [Incoming Fax Options].
¾ Select any button to change
the setting - a description of
each follows.
¾ Make changes as required.
¾ Select [Save].
Auto Answer Delay
Sets the delay in seconds before incoming calls are
automatically answered.
NOTE: This feature is restricted in some areas.
¾ Select [Auto Answer Delay].
¾ Select the scroll buttons to
set the time delay before
calls are answered.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-63
Ring Volume
¾ Select [Ring Volume].
¾ Select [High], [Normal] or
[Low] as the default ring
volume.
Junk Fax Prevention
This feature programs the machine to only accept incoming fax
documents from remote machines whose Local ID numbers
are programmed into the Dial Directory. All other fax
documents are rejected thereby ensuring junk fax documents
such as advertisements and circulars are not received.
¾ Select [Junk Fax
Prevention].
¾ Select [On] to enable this
feature and [Off] to switch
this feature off.
¾ Select [Save].
Page 11-64
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Receive Header Print (DC440/432/430/425)
When enabled the machine automatically prints information
about the transmitting machine on the top of each page.
¾ Select [Receive Header
Print].
¾ Select [On] or [Off].
Secure Fax Receive (DC440/432/430/425)
This feature ensures that incoming faxes are treated as secure
faxes.
¾ Select [Secure Fax
Receive].
¾ Select [On] or [Off].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-65
Line Use Restriction (DC440/432/430/425)
Where more than one line is connected to the DC440/432/430/
426/425/420, this feature enables one line to be reserved for
incoming fax documents.
NOTE: It is recommended that Line 1 is used to receive faxes
and Line 2 set to transmit and receive faxes.
¾ Select [Line Use
Restriction].
¾ Select [Line 1] or [Line 2].
¾ Select [Receive Only] to
reserve this line for incoming
fax documents.
¾ Alternatively, select
[Transmit and Receive] to
enable the chosen line to
accept incoming and
outgoing fax documents.
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Close].
Page 11-66
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Auditron Setups
The Auditron feature enables machine usage to be tracked and
/ or controlled, preventing unauthorized access to the machine
and enabling recharges for prints to be applied.The options
available are described below - the chosen option must initially
be enabled by the Xerox Service representative.
NOTE: The default password is #22222 which may be used if
PINs have not yet been assigned.
• The Internal Auditron is a built-in electronic accounting
system that enables system usage to be tracked in
machine memory by account number. When enabled, the
user enters an account number prior to using the
machine. The numbers of prints made using the Account
are tracked by internal counters which can be viewed on
the User Interface screen by a user with Auditron
Administrator privileges.
Quick Pathway
¾Select
[Access]
onthe
Control Panel
¾Select [#] on the
control panel
¾Enter the Auditron
Administrator PIN -
see NOTE
• The Job Based Accounting (DC440/432/430/425) this
feature is an external device available on network
configured machines only. It uses an external accounting
system server to store account data.
¾Select [Enter] in the
pop-up window
• The Foreign Interface feature enables an external
control device such as a coin-operated device, a bill
acceptor, a card reader, or a network controlled tracking
system.
¾Select [Auditron
Setups]
NOTE: When the Internal Auditron is used with an External
Control Device, the External Control Device will take
precedence over the Internal Auditron for that service.
The Auditron Setups are used initially to set up the Auditron
accounts, feature, and job limits, job completion procedures
and periodically to gain access to account usage information.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-67
Access to the Auditron Setups is controlled by a Personal
Identification Number (PIN), and it is limited on the DC440/432/
430/425 to users who have Auditron Administrator privileges
and on the DC426/420 to users who have Owner privileges.
For further information about privileges, please refer to
“Access Rights” on page 11-86.
Access Auditron Setups
¾ Select [Access]
on
the Control Panel.
A pop-up window will be
displayed on the Touch Screen.
¾ Select [#] on the Control
Panel and use the number
keypad to enter an Auditron
Administrator PIN.
¾ Select [Enter] in the pop-up
window.
¾ Select [Auditron Setups].
Page 11-68
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select the option required.
- For Internal Auditron refer
to “Internal Auditron
page 11-69.
- For External Control
Device refer to “Foreign
Interface Device” on page
11-84.
- For External Accounting
refer to “Job Based
Accounting (optional)
Internal Auditron (DC440/432/430/425)
Internal Auditron setups on the DC440/432/430/425 covers the
following topics:
Quick Pathway
¾Select
1. Auditron Enable Setups—to set up the Auditron for one or
more services.
[Access]
onthe
Control Panel
2. Account Setups—to set up the Auditron accounts, delete
accounts and to set counter limits for each account.
¾Select [#] button on the
Control Panel
3. Job Limit Policy—to set up how the machine should
behave when an account reaches its account limit.
¾Enter Auditron
Administrator PIN -
see NOTE
4. Account Summary—reviews all the auditron accounts.
NOTE: The default password is #22222 which may be used if
PINs have not yet been assigned.
¾Select [Auditron
Setups]
¾Touch [Internal
Auditron]
Auditron Enable Setups (DC440/432/430/425)
This setup enables the Auditron services to be enabled or
disabled as required. One or more services can be selected.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-69
¾ Access Auditron Setups.
NOTE: The screen may show
more options dependent on
configuration.
¾ Select [Internal Auditron].
¾ Select [Auditron Enable
Setups].
¾ Select the services to be
enabled or disabled for the
Auditron - see below.
¾ Select [Save].
Copy enables/disables Auditron for Copy jobs.
Fax enables/disables Auditron for Fax jobs.
NOTE: The choice available will depend on the machine
configuration - for example if the machine does not have Fax
capability, then the Fax option will not be displayed.
Account Setups (DC440/432/430/425)
This setup is used to create, delete or modify the accounts.
Depending on local requirements for tracking usage, one
account number can be assigned to each department or one
account number assigned to each individual. A maximum of
2000 accounts can be programmed into the machine. Account
numbers can contain between 4 and 16 digits.
Page 11-70
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Internal Auditron].
¾ Select [Account Setups].
¾ Make selections as required -
see below for a description of
each.
¾ Select [Save].
Add/Modify Accounts (DC440/432/430/425)
To add an account:
¾ Select [Add Account].
¾ Enter the account number
(between 4 and 16 digits
long) using the screen
keypad.
¾ Select [Save].
To modify an account:
¾ Select the account number
and select [Modify
Account].
¾ Select the services and copy
limits for the selected
account.
¾ Select [Save].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-71
All Limits the same use the popup keypad to enter a limit in units of 100 to restrict
the number of prints which can be assigned to this account for
all the services selected.
Change Limit use the popup keypad to enter a limit in units of 100 to restrict
the number of prints which can be assigned to this account for
each service selected.
No Limit select this button to assign no restriction on the number of
prints for this account for each service selected.
Not Allowed a value of 0 will be displayed. No prints can be allocated to this
account for the service selected.
HINT: Users can check the status of their accounts by
selecting Machine Status on the Control Panel. Auditron is on
the Reports & Counters tab.
Delete Account
¾ Select the account number to
be deleted.
¾ Select [Delete Account].
¾ Select [Confirm].
¾ Select [Close].
Page 11-72
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Reset All Counters
¾ To reset the counters for ALL
ACCOUNTS to zero, select
[Reset All Counters] at the
top of the screen.
¾ Select [Confirm].
¾ Select [Close] to continue.
Reset All Limits
¾ To reset the limits for ALL
ACCOUNTS to zero, select
the [Reset All Limits].
¾ Select [Confirm].
¾ Select [Close].
Delete All Accounts
¾ To delete ALL ACCOUNTS
select [Delete All
Accounts].
¾ Select [Confirm].
¾ Select [Close].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-73
Job Limit Policy (DC440/432/430/425)
This feature sets machine behavior when the user’s account
limit has been reached. When the limit is reached, the machine
will either stop the current job immediately or let the job finish
and go over the limit.
¾ Select [Internal Auditron].
¾ Select [Job Limit Policy].
¾ Select the preferred option -
see below for a description of
each.
¾ Select [Save].
Terminate Immediately the machine will stop the job as soon as the account limit has
been reached. For the Copy feature, any pages committed to
print will be allowed to print. Therefore the account limit may be
exceeded. The maximum number of pages allowed after the
limit has been reached is three pages. For Fax jobs, no extra
pages are allowed beyond the account limit.
Terminate on Job Boundary the machine allows the current job to be completed. No further
jobs are allowed until the limit is increased or the counter reset.
Account Summary (DC440/432/430/425)
This feature provides access to all of the Auditron accounts
and their associated counters. It also enables an individual
counter or all account counters to be cleared and account
information to be downloaded to a PC or printer.
Page 11-74
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Account Summary].
¾ Make selections and
changes as required. See the
following page for details.
Scroll List use the scroll buttons to access each account to review the
counters associated with that account. The scroll list displays
all accounts in numerical order with the lowest account number
appearing at the top of the list.
Search to access a particular account, select [Search], enter the
account number and select [Save].
Counters and Limits Display this display provides the current value and limit of the counters
for each service associated with the selected account.
Clear Counters resets the counters for the selected account to zero. Select
[Confirm] in the pop-up window and [Close] to continue.
Clear All Counters resets all the counters for ALL OF THE ACCOUNTS to zero.
Select [Confirm] in the pop-up window and [Close] to
continue.
Download All Accounts downloads Auditron information to a PC. However, the
(DC440/432/430/425) download process requires additional external hardware in
order to operate. Contact the Xerox Sales representative for
further information.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-75
Internal Auditron (DC426/420)
Internal Auditron setups on the DC426/420 models cover the
following topics:
Quick Pathway
¾Select
1. Service Access Setup—to set up the Auditron for one or
more services.
Access]
on the
Control Panel
2. Account Setup—to set up the Auditron accounts, delete
accounts and to set counter limits for each account.
¾Enter Owner PIN - see
NOTE
3. Job Completion Setup—to set up how the machine should
behave when an account reaches its account limit.
¾Select [Auditron
Setups]
NOTE: The default password is #22222 which may be used if
¾Select [Internal
PINs have not yet been assigned.
Auditron].
¾Select a button
Service Access Setup (DC426/420)
¾Make changes as
required
This setup enables the Auditron services to be enabled or
disabled as required. One or more services can be selected.
¾Select [Save] to
continue.
¾ Access Auditron Setups.
¾ Select [Internal Auditron].
Page 11-76
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Service Access
Setup].
¾ Make selections as required
for each Service - see below
for a description of each.
¾ Select [Save].
Off (No Auditron) enables/disables Auditron for the service selected.
Auditron Without Account enables Auditron and allows unlimited usage for each account
Limits for the service selected.
Auditron With Account Limits enables Auditron and allows usage limits to be set for each
account for the service selected.
NOTE: The choice available will depend on the machine
configuration - for example if the machine does not have Fax
capability, then the Fax option will not be displayed.
Account Setup (DC426/420)
This setup is used to create, delete or modify the accounts.
Depending on local requirements for tracking usage, one
account number can be assigned to each department or one
account number assigned to each individual. A maximum of
2000 accounts can be programmed into the machine. Account
numbers can contain between 4 and 16 digits.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-77
¾ Access Auditron Setups.
¾ Select [Internal Auditron].
¾ Select [Account Setup].
¾ Make selections as required -
see below for a description of
each.
¾ Select [Close].
Add Accounts
¾ Select [Add Account].
¾ Enter the new account
number (between 4 and 16
digits long) using the pop-up
keypad.
¾ Select [Save].
¾ Select [Close] to exit.
Page 11-78
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select the services required
for this account.
¾ Make other selections for this
account as required - see
below.
¾ Select [Save] and then
[Close].
Scroll buttons a new limit can be entered to restrict the number of prints which
can be assigned to this account.
Unlimited there is no limit on the number of prints that can be assigned to
this account.
Reset Count the counters for this account will be reset to zero.
HINT: Users can check the status of their accounts by
selecting Machine Status on the Control Panel. Auditron is on
the Reports & Counters tab.
Delete Account the selected account will be deleted.
Modify Account displays the services and copy limits for the selected account.
Clear Counters resets counters for the selected account to zero.
Reset All Accounts resets counters for ALL ACCOUNTS to zero.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-79
Download All Accounts downloads Auditron information to a PC. However, the
download process requires additional external hardware in
order to operate. Contact the Xerox Sales representative for
further information.
¾ To download account
information select
[Download All Accounts]. A
message will appear
confirming that the download
is in progress.
¾ On completion a confirmation
message will be displayed.
¾ Select [Close].
Job Completion Setup (DC426/420)
This feature sets machine behavior when the user’s account
limit has been reached. When the limit is reached, the machine
will either stop the current job immediately or let the job finish
and go over the limit.
¾ Access Auditron Setups.
¾ Select [Internal Auditron].
Page 11-80
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Select [Job Completion
Setup].
¾ Make selections as required -
see below for a description of
each.
Terminate Job if set to On, the machine will stop the job as soon as the
account limit has been reached - any pages committed to print
will be allowed to print.
Delete Pending Jobs if set to On, when an account limit is reached all pending jobs
assigned to this account will be deleted.
¾ To download account
information select
[Download All Accounts]. A
message will appear
confirming that the download
is in progress.
¾ On completion a confirmation
message will be displayed.
¾ Select [Close].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-81
Job Based Accounting (optional) (DC440/432/430/425)
Job Based Accounting is an optional external accounting
Quick Pathway
¾Select
system installed via a floppy disc and set up by the System
Administrator. It can be used for Copy, Embedded Fax,
LanFax, Server Fax, E-mail, Print and Scan jobs.
[Access]
on the
Control Panel
NOTE: The set of data collected for accounting will vary for
each job type in the system.
¾Select [#] button on the
Control Panel
The Document Centre must be connected to the network for
this feature to operate as the network is used to communicate
job-logging data to an External Accounting System (EAS).
Once the installation is complete the EAS is given the IP
address of the machine. Data is then collected by the EAS
Server at regular intervals.
¾Enter Auditron
Administrator PIN -
see NOTE
¾Select [Auditron
Setups]
¾Select [External
Accounting]
The EAS must have Internet access. The External Accounting
System uses the Internet Address (for example the IP address)
to gain access to the Document Centre.
When a job is submitted to the machine, users are prompted to
type in a User ID and an Account ID. A remote server will
supply a set of valid user and account numbers to the system
and the machine validates this data before the job is allowed to
begin.
Jobs can also be submitted to the Document Centre using the
CentreWare driver. Refer to the CentreWare Customer
Documentation for further information.
NOTE: The default password is #22222 which may be used if
PINs have not yet been assigned.
To enable Job Based Accounting a floppy disk must be
purchased from Xerox. The floppy disk is used to install the
software.
NOTE: This feature cannot be used if the Internal Auditron or
External Auditron is in use.
Once the floppy has been installed then Job Based Accounting
can be enabled as follows:
Page 11-82
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
1. Enable the software using the floppy disc.
2. Configure the Third Party Accounting System.
3. At the machine enable Job Based Accounting.
¾ Access Auditron Setups.
¾ Select [External
Accounting]. Make
selections as required - a
description of each follows.
Enable /Disable enables/disables Job Based Accounting.
User ID Display displays the user ID. This can be set as Open Text or Secure.
If Secure is selected the characters entered will be displayed
as *******.
Account ID Display displays the account ID. This can be set as Open Text or
Secure. If Secure is selected the characters entered will be
displayed as *******.
Default User ID used by the System Administrator to enter a default user
number which can be used by users. Users may still edit the
ID as normal but must delete the entry before entering another
number.
Default Account ID used by the System Administrator to enter a default account
number which can be used by users. Users may still edit the
ID as normal but must delete the entry before entering another
number.
Action when full sets the machine to either Disable Accounting or Declare Fault
when an account is full. This will normally occur when the
machine has logged 2000 jobs and has not been polled by the
EAS server to send the Job Log.
NOTE: Job Interrupt is available when this feature is enabled.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-83
Foreign Interface Device
A Foreign Interface Device might be a coin-operated device, a
bill acceptor, a card reader, or a network controlled tracking
system installed on the system. The device must initially be
enabled by the Xerox representative.
Quick Pathway
¾Select
[Access]
on the
This device controls Copier print services only.
Control Panel
¾Select [#] button on the
¾ Access Auditron Setups. Refer to “Access Auditron Setups”
Control Panel
on page 11-68 for more information.
¾Enter Auditron
Administrator PIN -
see NOTE
¾ Select [External Control Device]. Make selections as
required - a description of each follows.
NOTE: The default password is #22222 which may be used if
PINs have not yet been assigned.
¾Select [Auditron
Setups]
¾Select [External
Control Device]
Off to specify that a Foreign Interface Device is not connected.
Per-Page Control to set the device for tracking each page in each job separately.
For example, for a coin-operated device, set External Auditron
to Per-Page Control. Otherwise, more than the current page
will be printed, even though only one coin was inserted.
Page 11-84
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Monitor without limits to set the device to track the usage of the machine, but not to
limit users to a number of copies or prints.
Monitor with limits to set the device to track the usage of the machine, but limit
users to a number of copies or prints.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-85
Access Rights
Personal Identification Numbers (PINs) and privileges are
assigned to users who need to access the Setup Tools. Up to
100 PINs, each between 4 and 16 digits long, may be
assigned. There are different levels of privileges, depending on
machine configuration:
Quick Pathway
¾Select
[Access]
onthe
Control Panel
- Key Operator
¾Select [#] button on the
Control Panel
- System Administrator
- Auditron Administrator (DC440/432/430/425)
- Owner
¾Enter Owner PIN - see
NOTE
¾Select [Additional
Setups] (if necessary)
NOTE: The factory default password is #22222. This
password is used initially, prior to new PINs being assigned.
To prevent unauthorized access, it is recommended you change
this password. Please contact your Xerox Service Representative for
further assistance.
¾Select [Access Rights
Setups]
Page 11-86
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Each privilege determines the right to set up the default
settings for a specified set of functions, as shown in the table
below.
Key
System
Auditron
Owner
No
Operator Administrator Administrator
Machine Setups
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Copy
Setups
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Fax
Setups
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
N/A
Yes
No
Print
Setups
Network Scanning
Setups
E-mail Setups (DC440/ No
432/430/425)
Authentication Setups No
(DC440/432/430/425)
Auditron Setups
(DC440/432/430/425)
No
No
No
Auditron Setups
(DC426/420)
No
Access Rights
No
More than one privilege can be assigned to an individual user.
Customer preference determines whether individual privileges
are assigned to various users or all privileges assigned to only
ONE user.
The following table illustrates a situation where various
privileges are assigned to five users.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-87
Key
System
Auditron
PIN
1234
2345
3456
5678
4567
Owner
Operator Administrator Administrator
- PIN 1234 enables its assigned user to enter the Setup
Tools and access only the Auditron and Access Setup
features. This user cannot access any other Setups.
- PIN 2345 enables its assigned user to enter the Setup
Tools and access the Machine Setups, Copy Setups, and
Fax Setups. This user cannot access any other Setups.
- PIN 3456 enables its assigned user to enter the Setup
Tools and access the Print Setups, E-mail Setups and the
Network Scanning Setups. This user cannot access any
other Setup buttons.
- PIN 5678 enables its assigned user to access Machine
Setups, Copy Setups, Fax Setups, Access Rights setups
and Auditron Setups on the DC426/420.
- PIN 4567 enables its assigned user to enter the Setup
Tools and access ALL of the Setups.
Page 11-88
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Assign Privileges
¾ Select [Access]
on
the Control Panel.
A pop-up window will be
displayed on the Touch Screen.
¾ Select [#] on the Control
Panel, and enter a PIN with
Owner Privileges.
¾ Select [Enter] in the pop-up
window.
NOTE: The factory default password is #22222. This
password is used initially, prior to new PINs being
assigned. To prevent unauthorized access, it is
recommended you change this password. Please contact your
Xerox Service Representative for further assistance.
¾ If necessary, select
[Additional Setups].
¾ Select [Access Rights].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-89
Add Pin
¾ Select [Add Pin].
¾ Using the pop-up keypad,
enter a number between 4
and 16 digits.
¾ Select [Save].
Set User Privileges
¾ Use the search facility or
scroll buttons to select the
user pin number for the user
whose privileges are to be
set or modified.
¾ Select the desired button(s)
to add or remove privileges.
Refer to page 11-87 for a
description of each.
¾ Select [Confirm].
Page 11-90
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Service Access Control - Authentication Mode
(DC440/432/430/425)
Authentication is an optional feature available on a network
Quick Pathway
¾Select [
connected DC440/432/430/425. Authentication restricts
access to Server Fax, Network Scanning and E-mail. Users will
be required to enter a name and/or password to access these
screens.
Access]
on the
Control Panel
NOTE: If a user is logged on to Network Accounting or the
Auditron at the same time as Authentication, the user will be
logged off the other service at the same time as logging off
from Authentication.
¾Select [#] button on the
Control Panel.
¾Enter the System
Administrator PIN.
¾Select [Additional
Setups].
¾Select[Service Access
Control].
NOTE: Refer to the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 System
Administration Guide for more information.
Guest Access the System Administrator can configure a passcode number to
protect certain features from unauthorized access. Users must
enter this passcode number to gain access.
Page 11-92
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Networked Authenticated when enabled users will need to enter their name and
Access password to gain access to protected features. The user name
and password are sent to a server for verification. Users have
the option of selecting an alternative verification server.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-93
Network Scanning Setups
Network Scanning is an optional feature available on a network
Quick Pathway
¾Select
connected DC440/432/430/426/425/420. When enabled this
feature allows users to scan hard copy documents at the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 and store the images on a
NetWare or TCP/IP file server.
[Access]
onthe
Control Panel
NOTE: Refer to the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 System
Administration Guide for more information.
¾Select [#] button on the
Control Panel.
¾Enter the System
Administrator PIN.
¾Select [Network
Scanning].
Job Template Pool
This feature provides the filing protocol option for the location
of the template pool. The default settings for either TCP/IP or
Netware can be set here.
Default Repository
This is the filing location that is used by the default template
(@default.xst).
Page 11-94
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
If File Already Exists
Allows the System Administrator to select the Filing Policy
contained in the default template. The Filing Policy determines
how the scanned file will be stored in the repository and is
referred to ‘If File Already Exists’ on the Document Centre.
Confirmation Sheet
The Confirmation Sheet prints a summary of details associated
with the scanning and distribution of a Network Scanning job.
Update All Templates
Applies the changes to all the templates.
Public Repository 1,2,3,4
Up to five public repositories can be set up. These are the
Default Repository and Repositories 1,2,3 and 4. These public
repositories can be selected when a scan template is created.
The scan template for a public repository includes the name
and the password required for access to the repository.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-95
Print Setups
Print Setups options are set up by the System Administrator.
These setups and defaults are relevant to the DC440/432/430/
426/425/420 as a fully networked printer.
Quick Pathway
¾Select
[Access]
onthe
NOTE: Refer to the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 System
Control Panel
Administration Guide for more information.
¾Select [#] button on the
Control Panel.
¾Enter the System
Administrator PIN.
¾Select [Print Setups].
Port Setups
set up the required port on the system. Ethernet, Parallel Port
or Token Ring are the available options.
Protocol Setups
Sets up the machine settings that correspond with the protocol
being used. For example, NetBIOS/NetBEUI, AppleTalk,
NetWare, TCP/IP.
Page 11-96
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Printer Setups
Sets up the following options on the machine:
- Banner Sheet - a cover sheet that is printed with the job.
- Start Page - specifies whether or not a startup page is
automatically printed each time the machine is powered
on.
- Job Settings - customizes the Number of Copies,
Collated Sets, Sides Printed or Image Quality features.
- Tray Settings - used to assign the default Tray Priority,
enable or disable Auto Tray Switching and specify the
Destination Tray.
NOTE: This feature is not available on single tray
configurations.
- Media Settings - specifies the default size, type and
colour of stock used for printing documents, and specifies
the default type and colour for printing Banner Sheets and
Reports. Also enables and disables the Media Colour
Substitution for the Banner Sheet.
- Hold Job Auto Delete - used to enable or disable the
buttons displayed on the Hold Job Auto Delete screen.
When enabled the System Administrator can specify a
hold interval of between 1 and 120 hours, after which time
the job(s) will be automatically deleted.
Postscript Setups
The Postscript Setups feature allows the System Administrator
to enable or disable an error sheet for postscript printing errors.
PCL Setups
Allows the System Administrator to select and format the
available PCL Resident Fonts.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-97
E-mail Setups (DC440/432/430/425)
E-mail is an optional feature available on a network connected
Quick Pathway
¾Select
DC440/432/430/425. When enabled this feature allows users
to e-mail to scan an original document, convert the scanned
document to an electronic format and then send that
information to one or more e-mail address destinations.
[Access]
onthe
Control Panel
NOTE: Refer to the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 System
Administration Guide for more information.
¾Select [#] button on the
Control Panel.
¾Enter the System
Administrator PIN.
¾Select [Additional
Setups].
¾Select [E-mail Setups].
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 11-99
Page 11-100
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Ordering Supplies
A variety of supplies, such as the Copy/Print Cartridge,
cleaning solutions, editing markers and staples are available
for the DC440/432/430/426/425/420.
To obtain supplies, contact the local Xerox office, giving the
company name, the product number and it’s serial number.
Use the space below to record the telephone number:
Supplies Telephone Number:
.....................................................................
Page 12-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Cleaning the DC440/432/430/426/425/420
Proper maintenance is important for the smooth operation of
any equipment.
CAUTION:When cleaning the DC440/432/430/426/425/420,
do not use organic or strong chemical solvents or aerosol
cleaners. Do not pour fluids directly onto any area. Avoid
supplies that are not specifically listed as approved in
this documentation, they can cause poor performance
and create a dangerous condition. Use supplies and
cleaning materials only as directed in this documentation.
Keep all cleaning materials out of the reach of children.
WARNING: Do not remove the covers or guards that are
fastened with screws. You cannot maintain or service any
of the parts that are behind these covers and guards. Do
not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not
specifically described in the documentation supplied with
the DC440/432/430/426/425/420.
The Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport Glass
To ensure optimum print quality at all times, clean the
document glass and constant velocity transport glass monthly,
or more often if needed. This helps avoid output with streaks,
smears and other marks that transfer from the glass area when
scanning documents.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 12-3
¾ To clean the glass areas use
a lint-free cloth, lightly
dampened with water or
Xerox Lens and Mirror
Cleaner.
¾ Clean the white tabs, located
on the under side of the
Document Cover and in the
Document Feeder, to remove
dry ink smudges and other
marks.
The Control Panel and Touch Screen
Regular cleaning keeps the touch screen and Control Panel
free from dust and dirt. To remove finger prints and smudges,
clean the control panel and touch screen with a soft, lint-free
cloth, lightly dampened with water.
The Document Feeder and Output Trays
Use a cloth moistened with water to clean the Document
Feeder, output trays, paper trays and the outside areas of the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420.
Page 12-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Replacing the Copy/Print Cartridge
The Copy/Print Cartridge is a customer replaceable unit. This
assembly holds the dry ink for the DC440/432/430/426/425/
420.
After approximately 14,000 copies/prints the touch screen will
display a message that it is time to order a new cartridge. When
this message appears, make sure that a new cartridge is
ordered. Do not replace the cartridge at this point, wait until the
replace cartridge message appears.
CAUTION:When ordering a new Copy/Print Cartridge
make sure the correct cartridge is ordered for the
Document Centre by specifying which Document Centre
model you have. For assistance the product number will
be displayed on the cartridge box. Cartridges for the
DC440/432/430/425 and the DC426/420 are not compatible.
WARNING:Do not shake an empty cartridge or hold it
close to you. Some dry ink residue might accidentally
spill. Do not shake the empty Copy/Print Cartridge and
return it to the machine to extend its use.
Removing the old Copy/Print Cartridge
NOTE: If the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 does not include
the Finisher and/or High Capacity Feeder, ignore the first step.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 12-5
¾ Slide the Finisher and/or High
Capacity Feeder away from
the machine.
¾ To open the Duplex Module
door, release the lever
located at the front of the
Duplex Module.
Page 12-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
¾ Release the handle to open
the Upper Left Door.
¾ Pull the Left Front Cover
open towards you.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 12-7
¾ Holding the coloured lever, as
shown, slide the cartridge out
until you can take hold of the
handle on top of the
cartridge.
¾ Using the handle, lift the
cartridge out of the machine.
CAUTION:Hold the empty Copy/Print Cartridge away
from you to avoid spilling any dry ink residue.
Page 12-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Recycling the Copy/Print Cartridge
The Print/Copy Cartridge is designed to be re-manufactured.
However, refilling the cartridge is not recommended because
critical components may need replacing. To recycle used Print/
Copy Cartridges, return them to Xerox in the original
packaging. Return labels are included with each new cartridge.
Inserting the new Copy/Print Cartridge
¾ Remove the new Copy/Print
Cartridge from the box.
Vigorously shake the
cartridge from side to side
before removing it from the
bag.
¾ Remove the paper strip
protector. Refer to the
instructions with the
packaging for more
information.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 12-9
¾ Holding the cartridge by its
handle, slide it into the frame
in the machine. Let go of the
handle as you slide the Copy/
Print Cartridge all the way to
the back of the frame. It must
click into place.
¾ Pull the coloured tab to
remove the sealing tape from
the cartridge. It is located on
the front of the cartridge.
CAUTION:To avoid spills, do not remove the sealing tape
until the Copy/Print Cartridge is completely in place.
¾ Close the Left Front Cover.
NOTE: The Left Front Cover
will not close if the cartridge is
not completely in place.
¾ Close the Upper Left Cover.
IF FITTED
¾ Close the Duplex Module.
¾ Slide the Finisher and High
Capacity Feeder back in to
place.
Page 12-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
CAUTION:Occasionally, after the Copy/Print Cartridge is
replaced, the first page printed is blank. This is because
the roller has not yet turned over to distribute fresh dry
ink. If this happens, reprint the job.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 12-11
¾ The staple cartridge is
located inside the small door,
which has a staple imprinted
on the outside. Pull open the
door towards you.
¾ Take hold of the cartridge as
shown.
¾ Gently pull out the cartridge
and dispose of the unit.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 12-13
¾ Unpack the new stapler
cartridge.
¾ Slide the new cartridge into
place.
¾ Close the staple cartridge
door.
¾ If the Finisher tray does not
rise automatically, press and
release the button on top of
the Finisher to return the
Finisher Tray to its operating
position.
Page 12-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Convenience Stapler (optional)
¾ When the staple cartridge
needs replacing or a staple
jam occurs, the indicator light
on the right hand side of the
Convenience Stapler will be
lit.
A cartridge contains 5000
staples.
Indicator light
¾ Holding the sides of the
Convenience Stapler door,
gently pull the door open
towards you.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 12-15
¾ To remove the used
cartridge, hold the sides and
slide the staple cartridge
straight out of the stapler; do
not slide at an angle.
¾ Dispose of the used
cartridge.
¾ Unpack the new cartridge.
¾ Before replacing the new
cartridge, check the position
of the first staple. The staple
should be laying flat against
the metal striking plate. If the
staple is not in this position or
appears damaged, manually
remove the staple.
¾ Slide the new cartridge into
the stapler and close the
stapler door.
Page 12-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
13 Problem Solving
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 has built-in information to
help identify and manage error messages and problems. It also
contains troubleshooting and problem-solving procedures to
help quickly resolve the problem.
Refer to the information contained in this chapter to resolve any
problem solving issues.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-1
Fault Clearance Procedure
If a fault or problem occurs, there are several ways in which the
type of fault can be identified. Once a fault or problem is
identified, establish the probable cause and apply the
appropriate solution.
animated graphics and clear the fault in the order
specified.
- If the problem is not solved by following the screen
messages and graphics, refer to the problem solving
tables on the following pages and apply the appropriate
solution as described.
- Also refer to the faults codes displayed in the Print Queue
or Faults List in the Machine Status mode. Refer to page
13-16 for an explanation of some of the fault codes and
corresponding corrective actions.
- Alternatively, contact the DC440/432/430/426/425/420
Key Operator for assistance.
you follow the relevant power On/Off instructions as
described in Chapter 2 of this user guide.
CAUTION:Failure to leave at least 20 seconds between
repeated power OFF /ON can result in damage to the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 hard drive.
- If the problem persists, or a message indicates that you
should call for service, please refer to the “Call for Service
procedure” on page13-20.
NOTE: If Fax is enabled and a loss of power occurs, the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 will print a Power Off Report
when the machine is switched on. This will show a list of the
fax jobs lost during the power loss.
Page 13-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Clearing Jams
Media jams happen for a variety of reasons. Check the
guidelines below to reduce the potential for jams in the DC440/
432/430/426/425/420:
- Use only recommended media. Refer to “Paper and other
media” on page 10-1 and “Specifications” on page 14-1
for a list of recommended media types.
- Store media at a temperature between 50° and 90°
Fahrenheit (10° and 32° Celsius). Protect unused media
by storing it in its wrapper, on a flat surface.
- The orientation of the media in the paper tray must match
the orientation of the documents. Check the fill line in the
tray to ensure the paper tray is not overloaded.
- Do not use media that is torn, wrinkled, or folded.
To clear paper in any area of the machine, locate the green dial
or lever. Turn the dial or lift the lever in the direction shown to
remove paper.
When clearing Document Feeder jams always remove
documents in the direction they are travelling, for example,
away from the guides underneath the feeder.
NOTE: If the fault messages do not clear after having
removed paper jammed in the machine, switch the machine
off and then on again. Ensure that the relevant power On/Off
instructions as described in Chapter 2 of this User Guide are
followed.
CAUTION:Failure to leave at least 20 seconds between
repeated power OFF / ON can result in damage to the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 hard drive.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-3
Problem Solving Tables
If you are experiencing difficulty using the DC440/432/430/426/
425/420, check the suggestions in the following tables for
problem solving advice.
Symptom
Recommendation
The machine will not power ON
¾ Check the power cord installation.
¾ Check to see if the power button is in the
ON position.
¾ Check to see if the AC outlet is receiving
voltage. (Connect another appliance to
the outlet to verify the voltage.)
The machine makes a squealing noise
after it powers OFF
¾ 3 to 5 minutes after powering OFF, the
machine might make a squealing noise.
This is a normal occurrence. Various
components within the machine are still
powering OFF.
The document will not feed through the
Document Feeder
¾ Check to see if the Document Feeder is
overloaded. The Document Feeder can
hold a maximum of 50 pages.
¾ Check to see if the document is fully
inserted into the Document Feeder.
¾ Using a lint-free cloth, lightly wipe the
Platen Cushion located on the under
side of the Platen Cover.
The touch screen displays a message that ¾ Select Original Size on the touch screen
it can’t sense the size of the
document.
and enter the size.
Page 13-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Symptom
Recommendation
“Close lower left door” message.
¾ Slide the Finisher/High Capacity Feeder
away from the printer.
¾ Open the lower left door and then close
it. Ensure the door is latched securely in
place before sliding the Finisher/High
Capacity Feeder back.
The machine does not display the High
Capacity Feeder (or one of the paper trays)
in the Paper Supply selections.
¾ Check to see if any paper trays are
open. If a tray is ajar, the machine
cannot sense its connection.
¾ Open and close each paper tray and the
High Capacity Feeder, power OFF the
machine and then power ON the
machine.
The touch screen does not display the
Finisher/Stapler option
¾ Slide the Finisher into its correct
position. The Document Centre
configures itself when additional options
are attached.
The machine does not accept documents ¾ Check with the Key Operator about the
into memory
available memory capacity. If the
memory is almost full, print and delete
unnecessary files.
The machine displays a memory full error ¾ Check with the Key Operator about
message
available memory.
¾ Divide the remaining pages of the job
into several small jobs and run the job
again.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-5
Symptom
Recommendation
The machine did not enlarge an 8 1/2” x
11” document on to an 11” x 17”page
¾ 11” x 17”paper can only be loaded in the
trays short edge feed. Load the 8 1/2” x
11”document short edge feed. The
machine cannot rotate an image on 11” x
17”paper. It only rotates images on to 8
1/2” x 11”long edge feed paper.
¾ Select a percentage for enlargement.
The machine displays a tray fault.
¾ Open the paper tray.
¾ Move the paper tray guides away from
the paper.
¾ Move the paper tray guides against the
paper so that they are just touching the
paper.
¾ Power the machine Off and then On.
Deformed transparencies
¾ Check to see if Transparencies is
selected on the touch screen. The
machine automatically adjusts for
different types of media. Paper can
tolerate more heat than transparencies.
¾ Use the Left Tray instead of the Center
Tray.
Annotation did not work
¾ Check features programmed. Annotation
cannot be used with N Up (2 Up on the
DC426/420), Greyscale copying
(DC426/420), Booklet Creation, Build
Job, uncollated copies, custom size
documents, or Bound Documents. Re-
program the job.
Machine does not edit
¾ Replace the editing marker.
Inserts have images printed on them
¾ Insert blank sheets of paper with the
documents to mark each location for an
insert.
Page 13-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Symptom
Recommendation
Drilled paper holes are on the wrong side ¾ For two-sided copying using drilled
paper, load the paper the opposite of the
single sided copying instructions on the
tray. This is because the machine copies
the second side of a document first.
Blank output
¾ Check to see if the document is loaded
face up in the Document Feeder.
¾ If the Copy/Print Cartridge is new, the
toner might not be dispensed. Repeat
the job.
¾ Check to see if the seal tape is removed
from the new Copy/Print Cartridge.
¾ Reinstall the Copy/Print Cartridge.
¾ Replace the Copy/Print Cartridge.
Paper sometimes folds over when it is
delivered to the Finisher
¾ When using paper longer than 8 1/2” x
11”, select the Center Output Tray
instead of the Finisher. To staple the
output, begin by selecting and then
releasing the button on the top edge of
the Finisher. A green light is displayed.
(If a job is currently in process, the light
will flash. Wait until the job finishes and
then try again.) Looking at the Finisher
from the left end of the machine, you will
see an imprint of a staple next to a green
tab, above the Left Tray. Slide the
document face down toward the stapler,
over the green tab, until you hear the
click of the Finisher inserting the staple.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-7
Symptom
Recommendation
Using the Edit feature causes the machine ¾ Press firmly when using the marker to
to display a fault
ensure that the machine can detect the
edit marks.
¾ Do not select Interrupt or Pause when
using Edit.
¾ Keep the Document Feeder closed
securely when scanning an edited
document. The exception is when using
Bound Originals and Original Size.
¾ Do not place edit marks within 1/4” of the
edge of a document.
¾ The edited area must be fully enclosed.
If you draw a circle, square, or other
object around the area to be edited, you
must close the object to ensure that the
machine edits the area as programmed.
Page 13-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Symptom
Recommendation
Streaks, lines, spots OR black, solid,
dotted lines on every other copy
¾ Clean the Document Glass, CVT Glass,
areas under the Platen Cover, the
Document Feeder and the paper guides.
¾ If the machine has been idle for an
extended period of time, or if the Copy/
Print Cartridge is new, begin the job
again.
¾ Check the quality of the document. Use
Border Erase or Edge Erase to remove
lines and marks from the edges of the
document.
¾ Load fresh paper.
¾ Check the humidity in the machine
location. Refer to “Specifications” on
page 14-1 for environmental
specifications.
Output is too light or too dark
¾ Load fresh paper.
¾ Check the quality of the document.
¾ Select Lighter or Darker on the touch
screen.
¾ Run off more prints until the copy quality
has improved.
¾ Replace the Copy/Print Cartridge.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-9
Symptom
Output is too light
Recommendation
¾ If the Copy/Print Cartridge is new, the
toner may not be dispensed.
¾ Run off more prints until the copy quality
has improved.
¾ Set the Image Quality feature to a darker
setting.
Uneven print
¾ Replace the Copy/Print Cartridge.
Blurred images
¾ Load fresh paper.
¾ Load the documents, make a copy using
the Auto selections, collated to each
output tray.
¾ Replace the Copy/Print Cartridge.
Missing characters
¾ Load fresh paper.
¾ Reinstall the Copy/Print Cartridge.
Gloss variations (coining)
¾ Check the quality of the documents.
¾ If the document has large areas of solid
density, adjust the contrast.
Light copies when scanning glossy, shiny, ¾ Use the Document Glass instead of the
or coated documents through the
Document Feeder
Document Feeder.
Ghosting
¾ Check the quality of the documents.
¾ If transparencies are used, select
Transparency on the touch screen. The
machine automatically adjusts the
quality for transparencies.
¾ Feed the document short edge feed.
¾ Replace the Copy/Print Cartridge.
Page 13-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Symptom
Recommendation
Washout
¾ Check the quality of the documents.
¾ If the image is lighter near the borders,
select a darker Image Quality setting on
the touch screen.
¾ Replace the Copy/Print Cartridge.
Solid density variations
¾ Check the quality of the documents.
¾ Select Lighter or Darker on the touch
screen.
¾ Replace the Copy/Print Cartridge.
Image loss
¾ When copying a document from a larger
paper size to a smaller size, reduce the
image to fit onto the smaller paper size.
¾ If you are using 8 1/2” x 11”size paper,
reduce the document slightly (copying
90% instead of 100%).
¾ Select Auto Center on the touch screen.
Output does not reflect the selections
made on the touch screen
¾ Select Save after each selection on the
touch screen that contains a Save
button.
The Finisher does not stack output
correctly
¾ Check to see if the paper tray guides are
locked into position against the paper.
Pages in the set are not stapled.
¾ Check to see if the paper tray guides are
locked into position against the paper.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-11
Symptom
Recommendation
Misfeeds in the Bypass Tray
¾ Remove the paper and reload the tray.
Do not add paper to the tray when paper
is already loaded. Instead, remove the
paper, combine the additional paper with
the paper from the tray and reload the
tray.
¾ Check the guides are correctly
positioned around the paper loaded in
the tray.
¾ When loading paper in the Bypass Tray,
the Change Attributes box is displayed. If
you change the media BUT do not
change the attributes accordingly, the
machine might misfeed because it is
trying to sense a size or type that is not
loaded. Check the attributes and run the
job again.
Jams in the Document Feeder
¾ Open the Document Feeder and check
to see if any paper or objects are inside.
¾ Check to see if the top cover on the
Document Feeder is firmly closed.
¾ Check documents. If using computer
fanfold forms ensure that the
perforations down each side of the
sheets have been removed. When
removed the forms can be loaded either
short edge feed or long edge feed.
Page 13-12
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Symptom
Jams in the stapler
Recommendation
¾ Remove the staple cartridge from the
stapler and check the position of the first
staple. The staple should be lying flat
against the metal striking plate. If the
staple is not in this position or appears
damaged, manually remove the staple.
Refit the staple cartridge and try again, if
the problem persists replace the staple
cartridge.
Paper jams
¾ Check to see if the paper is loaded
correctly. Flip the paper over in the paper
tray.
¾ Check to see if the paper tray guides are
locked into position.
¾ Do not use media that is torn, wrinkled,
or folded.
¾ Load fresh paper.
Paper curls
correctly. Load paper in Paper Trays 1,
2, 3 and 4 seam side up.
¾ Load paper in the High Capacity Feeder
and Bypass Tray seam side down.
¾ Load non-standard media in the Bypass
Tray.
¾ Refer to “Paper and other media” on
page 10-1 for procedures.
Envelope Jams
¾ Turn the envelopes so that the gummed
edge is the trail edge.
With an external control device connected ¾ Check the external control device to
(such as a coin-operated device), the
machine displays a Ready to copy
message, but users cannot log in
ensure that it is properly connected and
powered on.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-13
Symptom
Recommendation
Can’t store a document for secure polling ¾ Delete any jobs stored in the Failed Fax
due to memory full
queue (DC426/420 only).
¾ Cancel the operation and try again later
when additional memory is available.
The fax communication finishes with an
error message
¾ Select Machine Status and check the list
of Failed Fax Jobs on the touch screen
for the error code and the message. Use
the description and corrective action in
the Table of Fault Codes at the end of
this chapter.
The machine will not answer incoming calls ¾ Set the machine to Automatic Answer
Mode.
The machine answers calls, but will not
accept incoming data
¾ If the job contains several graphics, the
machine might not have enough
memory. The machine will not answer if
memory is low. (Additional memory is an
option.)
¾ Remove stored documents and jobs and
wait for existing jobs to complete. This
will increase available memory.
An image is reduced on a transmission
¾ Confirm the original size of the
documents. Documents might be
reduced based on the available standard
paper supply at the receiving machine.
¾ If using Speed Dial, check the setting for
the Maximum Store Width that is
programmed for that Speed Dial. If the
document is wider than the programmed
setting, the document will be reduced to
match the programmed width.
Page 13-14
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Symptom
Recommendation
Received fax and report documents will not ¾ Check the fax enabled paper trays in
print
Machine Status. You might need to ask
the Key Operator to change the settings.
For example, if you want a fax to print on
blue paper and the Key Operator has
disabled fax printing on blue paper, you
cannot use it unless the Key Operator
enables fax printing on that specific type
of paper.
¾ Contact the Key Operator and make
sure that the Junk Fax feature is not
enabled in the Fax Communications
setups.
A fax will not print; it is marked Held in the ¾ Check Paper Supply Status in Machine
Fax Queue
Status to see if the paper in the paper
tray is fax enabled. If it is not enabled,
contact the Key Operator. For example,
if the Key Operator enabled only blue 8
1/2” x 11” paper for fax jobs, the machine
prints fax jobs only on blue paper. Or the
Key Operator might want to set up the
machine so fax documents do not print
on letterhead paper.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-15
Fault Codes and Messages
During a fault, the touch screen displays a message on how to
clear the fault.
Some faults indicate customer maintenance, while others
require the attention of the Key Operator. The following table
represents some of the fault codes and their corresponding
corrective actions, that may appear in the Print Queue or Faults
List available in the Machine Status mode.
Table of Fault Codes
Code
Description and Corrective Action
4A51
Document Feeder jam. Open the top cover of
the Document Feeder and remove any paper or
objects.
4B71
Copy/Print Cartridge error. Check to see that the
Copy/Print Cartridge has the correct part
number.
0060–0062
A communication error occurred. Check the
connection to the telephone line and begin
again.
00A3
0220
The job was stopped by selecting [Clear].
A communication error occurred. Check the
connection to the telephone line and begin
again.
0221
0222
The remote machine does not have the
capability to be polled.
The remote machine is unable to receive a
document. Contact the remote operator and
begin again.
Page 13-16
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Code
Description and Corrective Action
0223–0226
A communication error occurred. Check the
telephone line, select [Forced 4800] and begin
again.
0227
Memory became full during communication.
Check the available memory. Delete the job,
divide it into smaller jobs and begin again.
022C–022D
022E
A communication error occurred. Begin again.
Check the password for the remote machine
and begin again.
0230–0233
A communication error occurred. Check the
available memory. Verify that the dial directory
code contains a DTMF code after a secure code
and begin again.
0250–0252
A communication error occurred. Contact the
remote operator, check the telephone line and
begin again.
0254
0255
0291
0294
Operator error. The image size was changed to
match the capability of the remote fax.
Operator error. The resolution was changed to
match the capability of the remote fax.
An error occurred during diagnostics. Begin
again.
An error occurred during diagnostics. Begin
again.
02A1–02A3
02D1–02D5
0510–0542
A communication error occurred. Begin again.
A transmission error occurred. Begin again.
A communication error occurred. Check the
telephone line and the dial directory DTMF
sequence and begin again.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-17
Code
Description and Corrective Action
0545–056C
Either a dial tone was not detected or the
telephone circuit was busy. Check the
telephone line and begin again.
056D
The remote machine did not answer. Contact
the remote operator and begin again.
056E
The handset is off the hook. Reset the handset
and begin again.
056F
A communication error occurred. Check the
telephone line and begin again.
0570
Check the ID of the remote machine and begin
again.
0573–057A
Either the dial tone was not detected or the
telephone circuit was busy. Check the
telephone line and begin again.
057B
A communication error occurred. Begin again.
057E–0589
Either the dial tone was not detected or the
telephone circuit was busy. Check the
telephone line and begin again.
05E0–0601
A communication error occurred. Begin again.
Page 13-18
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Output Quality
Various situations can affect the quality of the output. Check
the following conditions to ensure optimum copy performance.
If you still cannot resolve the problem, contact the Key
Operator.
sunlight or near a radiator.
- Avoid sudden changes in the DC440/432/430/426/425/
420’s environment. When a change occurs, allow the
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 at least two hours to adjust
its settings to the new environment, depending on the
severity of the change.
- Follow regular maintenance schedules for cleaning areas,
such as the Document Glass, CVT and output trays. Refer
to “Maintenance” on page 12-1.
- Always set the media size sensor tab (at the rear of the
paper tray) to the size of the media in the tray. Otherwise,
you might experience jams, or dry ink residue on the
output.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 13-19
Call for Service procedure
If the difficulty persists, contact the Xerox Welcome Center.
Xerox Welcome Center Telephone Number
The telephone number of the Xerox Welcome Center is
provided at the time of product installation. For convenience
and future reference, please record the telephone number in
the space below:
Canada (English, French, and local Toronto) 800-939-3769
United States 800-821-2797
Welcome Center Telephone Number:.................................
Page 13-20
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
14 Specifications
The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 adheres to strict
specifications, approvals and certifications. These
specifications are designed to provide for the safety of users
and to ensure that the machine operates in a fully functional
state. Use the specifications listed in this chapter to quickly
identify the capability of the machine.
If further specification information is required please contact
your Xerox Representative.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 14-1
Machine Specifications
Hardware Configuration
Simplex (DC425 cabinet configuration): processor/C rack with
scanner, cabinet with 1 tray and a Bypass Tray
Duplex: processor/C rack with Document Feeder and scanner,
duplex module, 4 paper trays stand and a Bypass Tray
NOTE: The above hardware configurations are for the
standard machine configuration.
Space Requirements:
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 with Duplex Module, Duplex/
Catch Tray: 72”D x 67”W (1828mmD x 1701mmW)
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 with High Capacity Feeder: 72”D
x 72” W (1828mmD x 1828mmW)
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 with Finisher, Finisher Stand (or
High Capacity Feeder), Finisher Output Tray. Duplex: 72”D x
79”W (1828mmD x 2006mmW)
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 with Convenience Shelf, Duplex
/ Catch Tray: 72”D x 79 1/2”W (1828mmD x 1943mmW)
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 with Finisher, Finisher Stand (or
High Capacity Feeder), Convenience Shelf, Duplex: 72”D x 88
1/2”W (1828mmD x 2247mmW)
DC440/432/430/426/425/420 with Duplex Module, Finisher,
Finisher Stand (or High Capacity Feeder), Finisher Output
Tray, Tower Mailbox: 72”D x 104 1/2”W (1828mmD x
2654mmW)
Machine Weight
Basic configuration approximately 265lbs
Accessibility
From the front and sides
Page 14-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Copier Speed from paper tray 1
DC420: One-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 20 cpm
11” x 17” SEF: 10 cpm
Two-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 20 copies per side
11” x 17” SEF: 10 copies per side
DC425: One-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 25 cpm
11” x 17” SEF: 20 cpm
Two-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 25 copies per side
11” x 17” SEF: 20 copies per side
DC426: One-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 30 cpm
11” x 17” SEF: 14 cpm
Two-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 30 copies per side
11” x 17” SEF: 14 copies per side
DC430/432: One-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 32 cpm
11” x 17” SEF: 20 cpm
Two-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 23 copies per side
11” x 17” SEF: 14 copies per side
DC440: One-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 40 cpm
11” x 17” SEF: 20 cpm
Two-sided:
8 1/2” x 11” LEF: 31 copies per side
11” x 17” SEF: 14 copies per side
First Copy Out Time for the DC426/420
Center Tray using the Document Feeder: 6 seconds
Center Tray using the Platen Glass: 4.7 seconds
Left Tray: after the job is scanned
First Copy Out Time for the DC440/432/430/425
Center Tray using the Document Feeder: 6.9 seconds
Center Tray using the Platen Glass: 3.9 seconds
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 14-3
Left Tray: after the job is scanned
Warm-up Time
Cold Start: approximately 3 1/2 minutes
DC440/432/430/425 Digital Copier 55 seconds
DC426/420 Digital Copier 59 seconds
Document Feeder
Capacity: 50 sheets
Paper sizes: 8.1/2” x5.1/2” LEF through 11” x 17” SEF
Paper Weights: 16 - 32lb (substance 16 - 32)
Mixed Sizes: Yes - when selected on the user interface and the
lead edges have the same dimensions
Size Sensing: Yes
Paper Supply
Trays 1, 2, 3 & 4
Capacity: 500 sheets of 20lb (substance 20)
Paper Weights: 16 - 24lb (substance 16 - 24)
Paper Sizes: 8 1/2” x 5 1/2” LEF (tray 1 only), 8 1/2” x 11” SEF,
8 1/2” x 11” LEF, 11” x17” SEF
Auto Size Sensing:
DC440/432/430/425:10 sizes from tray 1, 8 sizes from trays 2,
3 and 4.
DC426/420: 8 sizes from all 4 trays.
Simplex/Duplex Feed: from all 4 trays
Media Type: Bond; Index; Covers; Labels; Transparencies;
Drilled; Standard; Preprinted; Recycled
Page 14-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Bypass Tray
Capacity: 50 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) per tray
Paper Weights: 16 -110lb (substance 16 - 110).
Paper Sizes: 4” x 6” SEF to 11” x 17” SEF
Auto Size Sensing: 6 sizes programmable by the user
Custom size programming
High Capacity Feeder (optional)
Capacity: 2000 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper
Paper Sizes: 8 1/2” x 11” LEF
Paper Weights: 16 - 110lb (substance 16 - 110).
Paper Supply for Envelope Tray (optional)
Capacity: 70 sheets of 24lb (substance 24) envelopes
Envelope Sizes: 6 1/2" x 3.9" to 10" x 7"
Paper Weights: 16 - 24lb (substance 16 - 24)
Center Tray
Capacity: approximately 500 sheets
Paper Sizes: 4” x 6” SEF to 11” x 17” SEF
Paper Weights: 16 - 110lb (substance 16 - 110)
Delivery: face down in order, with offsetting
Left Tray
Capacity: 200 sheets
Paper Sizes: 4” x 6” SEF to 11” x 17” SEF
Paper Weights: 16 - 110lb (substance 16 - 110)
Delivery: face up in order, without offsetting
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 14-5
Finisher (optional)
Capacity: 1000 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper
Paper Sizes: 8 1/2” x 5 1/2” to 11” x 17”
Paper Weights: 16 - 110lb (substance 16 - 110)
Set Size: 50 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper
Staples: 5000 per cartridge. Staples 2-50 sheets of 20lb
(substance 20) paper
NOTE: Envelopes should not be fed to the Finisher.
Convenience Stapler (optional)
Capacity: 50 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper
Staples: 5000 per cartridge. Staples 2-50 sheets of 20lb
(substance 20) paper
Page 14-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Tower Mailbox (optional)
10 bins
Capacity:
DC440/432/430/425: 100 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper
in each bin.
DC426/420: 70 sheets of 20lb (substance 20) paper in each
bin.
Paper Sizes: 5 1/2” x 8 1/2” / 8 1/2” x 11” LEF and 11” x 17” SEF
Paper Weights: 16 -24lb (substance 16 - 24)
Delivery: face down
NOTE: Envelopes should not be fed to the Finisher.
Electrical Specifications
Frequency:
50/60 HZ
Electrical Voltage:
102-140VAC
Power Consumption:
Maximum average - 1.38 KVA (@115VAC)
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 14-7
Specifications for the Embedded Fax Feature
Fax Transmission Speed
DC440/432/430/425: 33.6 Kbps with automatic fallback;
14.4Kbps and 4800bps operator-selectable
DC426/420: 14.4 Kbps (standard) with automatic fallback;
4800bps operator-selectable
Page Transmission Time - ITU No. 1 document
DC440/432/430/425: 33.6 Kbps (standard): less than 4
seconds
DC426/420:14.4 Kbps (standard): less than 7 seconds
Telephone Line Requirements
Standard public analogue switched telephone line or
equivalent.
Compatibility
Super G3 ECM; G3; Xerox proprietary mode (NSF)
Resolution Capability
200 x 100 dpi; 200 x 200 dpi; 200 x 400 dpi; 300 x 300 dpi; 400
x 400 dpi
Resolution Conversion
Available for sending and receiving; smooth on receiving
Image Compression
MH, MR, MMR
Long Document Send/Receive
Send: 3600 mm maximum length
Receive: 65535 lines
Connection Approvals
EU/EEA: certified by Xerox to Directive 1999/5/EC
Page 14-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
USA: approved to FCC Pt 68
Canada: approved to DOC CS-03
Other countries: certified to national PTT standards
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 14-9
Page 14-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Terms Defined
Use the definitions below to learn more about the meanings of
terms used in this Guide.
Activity Report a report that contains information about jobs sent and received.
Annotation a note or comment added to a document. This feature adds the
date, page numbers and a comment to the document.
APS Auto Paper Select.
Auditron a tracking system, which is built into the DC440/432/430/426/
425/420. You can use auditron to track overall machine usage,
individual usage and usage of each feature separately.
Auto Answer Mode A fax mode where the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 is
programmed to automatically answer calls.
Auto Exposure an image quality setting, which enhances documents that have
color backgrounds. The DC440/432/430/426/425/420 adjusts
its settings for different types of images.
Auto Off Mode a Power Saver Mode, in which the Digital Copier shuts off after
a combined 120 minutes of Stand-by and Low Power Modes,
or after a programmed time out.
Baud Rates units for measuring data transmission speed.
Bit Rates units for measuring data transmission speed.
BPS bits per second.
Chain Dialing a single dialing command that ties together keypad dialing and
dial directory locations for a single dialing operation.
Collated output programming whereas each copy set is delivered in the
same order the documents were placed in the Document
Feeder.
Page 15-2
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Comments To and From lines on a fax cover page, or an annotation on a
copy job.
Communication Mode selects the communication mode used for transmission to a
(440/432/430/425) remote fax machine for example, Super G3, G3 or Forced
4800bps.
Contrast the intensity of the display of an image, or the degree of
difference between the gray tones on a document page. See
also Halftone and Photo.
Copy/Print Cartridge a customer replaceable unit that contains xerographic
elements for the machine.
Copy Sets groups of copies of a multi-page set of documents. If you have
a four-page document and you want to make 10 copies of a
document, you will be making 10 copy sets.
Covers paper used to add to the front or back of a copy set, usually
colored stock.
Default Settings the settings used by the machine when the user does not
specify settings.
Delayed Polling retrieving documents from a remote fax machine at a delayed
time.
Delayed Start programming that enables the machine to process a document
at a later time.
Dial Directory a list of telephone numbers programmed into the machine for
easy access.
Dialing Characters special characters which apply only to Xerox machines that
support fax mailboxes.
Digital Copier a copier that scans an image once to make one or many
copies.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 15-3
Dual Tone Multi Frequency the use of a keypad sequence (tones) to transmit to, or poll
(DTMF) from, a remote mailbox.
Duplex referring to a document that contains an image on both sides
of the page.
Document Feeder an assembly that automatically separates and feeds double-
sided documents from the input tray into the scanner.
Embedded Fax (Facsimile) a document that is transferred from one location to another via
a telephone line.
Ethernet a network transport technology commonly used to send data
from one node to another.
External Accounting Server a network server used to access account information.
(EAS)
Factory Defaults settings which are incorporated into the machine at the factory
and used by the machine when the user does not specify
settings.
File Server a computer that has a hard disk drive large enough to hold and
share files. It provides the ability for multiple users to
simultaneously access the same file.
Forced 4800 (DC426/420) a setting that minimizes errors on telephone lines in areas of
low-quality communications or noise.
Foreign Interface Device a device (such as a magnetic card reader, coin-operated
device, or bill acceptor) that is connected to the exterior of the
machine and used to track machine usage.
Frame a group of data sent through the network.
Gray Scale Copying programming that enhances the image quality of a document
(DC426/420) beyond basic settings.
Page 15-4
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Group Dialing a form of abbreviated dialing that enables the dialing of multiple
locations by entering one three-character code. The machine
stores the image in memory and then transmits it to each
location.
Halftone gray patterns that are not black or white.
Head to Head a double-sided document whereas the second side displays
the image with the top of the document at the top of the page.
You typically turn over the page from the side edge.
Head to Toe a double-sided document whereas the second side displays
the image with the top of the document at the bottom of the
page. You typically turn over the page from the bottom edge.
Input the documents placed on the Document Glass, or in the
Document Feeder, to be scanned.
Inserts paper used to separate sections or topics in a set of
documents, typically colored stock.
IP Internet Protocol.
Job Based Accounting (JBA) An external accounting system installed via a floppy disk.
Job Monitor a pop-up window that appears on the Fax touch screen and
identifies information about the active job.
Key Operator a designated user who sets Machine, Copy, and Fax defaults
and maintains the machine.
Keypad the buttons on the control panel, or the buttons in a pop-up
keypad window on the touch screen.
LAN Fax enables PC clients to send faxes via a Document Centre.
Landscape the image orientation on a sheet of paper.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 15-5
LDAP An acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. A
protocol that allows sharing or corporate phone book
information.
Long Document a document that is longer than 23" (584.2 millimeters), typically
called a log.
Long Edge Feed (LEF) the long edge of the paper is positioned to enter the machine
first.
Low Power Mode a Power Saver Mode that reduces power consumption when
the machine is not in use.
Mailbox a storage area in the machine’s memory where fax documents
are stored.
Mailbox Polling retrieves a document from the mailbox of a remote machine.
Manual Answer Mode a selection that prevents the machine from automatically
answering the telephone.
Mask Data private data that the machine conceals when the forward slash
key (/) is selected, by displaying special characters in the place
of the private data.
Media Print prints Postscript and PCL files from a floppy disk inserted into
the floppy disk drive in the machine.
Memory a capacity for storing documents.
Node a number that identifies a network. It works like an address.
Non-Standard Paper sizes other than 5 1/2” x 8 1/2”, 8 1/2” x 11”, 8 1/2” x 14” and
11” x 17”.
Open System the DC440/432/430/426/425/420 is not connected to a tracking
system.
Options Report a report that lists the options currently installed on the machine.
Page 15-6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Output finished copies or received fax documents.
Owner a designated user who can assign machine access rights to
other users.
Password a four-digit number that provides access to and protects, an
electronic mailbox.
Pathway the route, or the buttons a user is required to select to display
a feature, such as Copy or Fax.
PCL Files (Printer Control Language file) the command language for the
HP LaserJet printers.
PDF Portable Document File.
Peer-to-Peer a network environment in which the nodes communicate
directly with other nodes.
Pending Jobs Report a report that lists the jobs that are in memory and the amount
of available memory.
Photo enhance photographs.
Polling retrieves a document from a remote machine.
Portrait the image orientation on a sheet of paper.
PostScript Files (PS files) a page description language from Adobe Systems,
Inc., that is used extensively on MACs and PCs as well as
workstations, mini computers, and main-frame.
Power Saver Modes energy saver modes that significantly reduce the power
consumption during periods of inactivity.
Printer Configuration Report a report that lists the status of the printer options, installed
options, PCL5 options, PostScript options and connectivity
options.
Printer Jam a media misfeeds when the machine is printing a document.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 15-7
Protocol the rules that control the transmitting and receiving of data.
Pulse-to-Tone switching between dialling types. This is useful when you need
pulse mode to connect and tone mode to access a mailbox or
another feature.
Queue a temporary storage unit for jobs waiting to be processed.
First Touch Screen the first touch screen displayed for each feature. It contains the
settings used most often.
Repository stores electronic documents.
Remote Terminal the terminal at the other end of the telephone line.
Resolution the amount of space between each line the machine scans.
Select the standard setting for normal documents and fine and
superfine settings for documents with more detail.
SAP Service Advertising Protocol.
Scan sensing or reading a paper document and connecting the
optical image of the document to an electronic image of the
document.
Segment a single page scan from the Document Glass, or a single or
multiple-page scan from the Document Feeder.
Server Fax (440/432/430/425) a walk up fax service which uses a Third Party Fax Server.
Short Edge Feed (SEF) the short edge of the paper is positioned to enter the machine
first.
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Sleep Mode a condition of reduced power consumption while the machine
is not performing a transaction.
Speed Dialing a form of abbreviated dialling that enables the dialing of a
number by entering a three-digit code.
Page 15-8
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Stabilizer Feet attachments that replace the casters under the machine and
keep it from moving.
Stand-by Mode a condition of reduced power consumption while the machine
is not performing a transaction.
Store for Polling to store a document in memory until it is retrieved by a remote
fax machine.
System Administrator a designated user who sets and maintains the network settings
on the machine.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
Transmission Report a report that confirms the status of a fax document.
Transmit to send.
Uncollated output programming whereas the specified number of copies
for each page in a copy set is delivered in the order the
documents were placed in the Document Feeder.
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Page 15-9
Page 15-10
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
Index
Numerics
authentication mode,network
scanning 22
2 up, copy 36
A
about this guide 1
access button 24
authentication mode,server fax
access fax communication
setup 58
Center
Shift(Copy) 27
-
Image
access rights setup 86
account information, machine
status 22
account setup (DC420) 77
account setups 70
account summary 74
activity report setup 47
add accounts setup 78
add/modify accounts setup 71
added features, copy 21
added features, scan 7
additional setups 15
localization 14
automatic stapling - finisher 12
basic image quality options, e-
basic image quality options,
network scaning 9
basic image quality, e-mail 9
basic image quality, network
scanning 9
batch send setup 62
booklet creation, copy 44
border erase setup 32
bound originals options, copy
26
administrator privileges (PIN)
setup 90
annotation options, copy 39
annotation, copy 38
answer mode, fax 36
area edit options, copy 32
bound originals, copy 25
bracket
internet
text
conventions 4
typeface,
assistance
tab,
services 14
asterisk button 24
auditron
broadcast & multi-poll reports
setup 48
build job, copy 48
build job, fax 25
bypass tray
foreign interface device 84
auditron access screen 26
auditron enable setup) 69
auditron setups 67
loading paper 6
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
i
Finisher
&
fitted 7
left tray fitted 7
bypass tray specifications 5
C
loading staples 15
specifications 6
stapler
call for service procedure 20
Canadian certification 16
Canadian CSØ3 Compliance
13
cautions, conventions 5
Center Tray 10
convenience stapler, stapling
conventions 3
bracket text typeface 4
hints 5
centre tray specifications 5
changing the default time
settings 12
notes 5
changing the default time
settings, power save
modes 12
warnings 5
cleaning
constant velocity transport
glass 3
control panel and touch
screen 4
document feeder 4
document glass 3
output tray 4
options 32
options 26
the machine 3
clear all button 24
clear button 24
clearing jams 3
build job 48
completed print jobs queue
56
collated output, copy 11
comment setup, fax 42
communication mode setup 52
communication mode, fax 21
company name setup 40
completed fax jobs queue 65
completed print job queue,
copy 56
covers 45
options 46
edit (DC420) 33
edit options (DC420) 33
erase 29
options 30
expert image quality 28
completed print jobs queue 9
ii
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
2. select the features
button 6
options 29
image adjustment 22
image quality 20
options 20
6. identify the job in the
print queue 9
image shift 27
options 27
inserts 42
job assembly 48
n up 36
original input (DC420) 22
original size 22
original size options 23
output 10
cover letter (cover page), fax
covers, copy 45
customer support number
output format 34
page edit 32
page edit options 33
paper supply 18
options 19
date setup 9
print queue 53
date/time setup 9
programming
a
new
default repository setup 94
delayed send,server fax 57
delete mailbox setup 55
dial directory setup, fax 37
comment 40
options 17
sides imaged 14
orientation 15
standard features 10
stored jobs 50
deleting
a
stored
copy job 52
retrieving a copy job
52
dial directory, deleting
number, fax 40
a
storing a copy job 50
transparencies 34
transparency options 36
uncollated output 11
dial directory, fax 16
dial pause button 24
Dialing(Fax) 10, 51
dialling digits reporting setup
43
Dialling(Fax) 10
dialling, fax 10, 51
copy setups, setups 25
copy/print
cartridge
replacement 5
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
iii
document
documents 2
document feeder specifications
feeder
loading
access 16
login,guest access 14
login,network
authenticated
access 15
original size 8
4
document
glass
placing
documents 4
document management fields,
internet services 22
document management fields,
network scanning 18
document
scanning 16
document path/volume,
network scanning 16
documentation, information
sources 6
duplex printing setup 45
E
edge erase setup 33
edit (DC420), copy 33
edit options (DC420), copy 33
electrical specifications 7
frequency 7
power consumption 7
voltage 7
e-mail 1
options 8
options 10
name,
network
options 11
using the address books 4
e-mail setups 99
e-mail, completed scan jobs
fax-advanced
embedded
features 7
authentication,logging off
18
basic image quality 9
energy star 16
envelope tray 8
loading 9
options 9
changing
authentication
service 17
erase 12
the
envelope tray paper supply
specifications 5
Environmental Choice 16
environmental choice 16
environmental compliance 16
erase options, copy 30
erase options, e-mail 12
options 12
image adjustment 7
internal address book 6
login
guest and network
erase
options,
network
iv
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
scanning 13
mixed
size
(DC420) 33
originals
erase, e-mail 12
more features 55
more features, embedded
fax 18
next destination 10
original size (DC440/432)
33
erase, network scanning 13
expert image quality options,
copy 29
expert image quality setup 31
expert image quality, copy 28
F
original type 8
poll remote fax 26
polling password button 29
print from mailbox 31
failed fax files setup (DC420)
56
fault clearance procedure 2
fault codes and messages 16
fault codes table 16
faults, machine status 21
fax 1
reports
&
setups-
embedded fax 34
resolution 7
sending an embedded fax
advanced
embedded fax 24
answer mode 36
features-
load
the
documents 3
build job 25
comment setup 42
communication mode 21
cover letter (cover page)
19
delayed start 22
deleting a dial directory
number 40
features-
embedded fax 7
free polling 27
dial directory 16
group 40
store 29
individual 37
dial directory setup 37
dialling 10, 51
secure polling 28
store to mailbox 30
telephone 13
fax reports 35
options 35
ISDN (digital line) 67
keypad 15
transmission report 20
fax approvals and certification
11
LAN fax features 62
lighter/darker 20
fax communication setup 57
fax file management setup 55
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
v
fax mailbox 30
fax mailboxes setup 53
fax panel default setup 50
high
capacity
feeder
fax printing options setup 44 hints, conventions 5
fax queue 63
I
fax report options setup 47
fax setups 34
ICES-003 10
if file already exists setup 95
fax specifications 8
fax status options 5
fax terminal options setup 38
FCC Part 68 Compliance 11
FCC regulations
image adjustment, copy 22
image adjustment, network
data coupler information
11
send header requirement
11
feature button 17
files for polling setup 56
finisher
incoming fax options setup 63
loading staples 12
finisher - automatic stapling 12
finisher - manual stapling 12
forced 4800 (DC420) setup 52
foreign interface device 84
free polling, fax 27
G
documentation 6
new copy/print
inserts, copy 42
interface options,
services 2
internal auditron setup 69
internet
glossary 1
internal
auditron
setup
glossary terms defined 2
(DC420) 76
gray scale copying(copy) 29 internet services 1
ground fault interrupter (GFI)
20
group dial directory, fax 40
assistance tab 14
document management
fields 22
interface options 2
job submission 4
maintenance tab 13
paperport 25
H
hash button 24
help (?) button 24, 27
high capacity feeder
loading 10
problem solving 28
vi
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
properties features 9
properties tab 8
public
&
repositories 15
queue tab 6
scan to fax 27
scan to file 24
scan with local copy 27
services tab 4
standard features 2
status tab 7
loading paper in the bypass
tray 6
loading paper, preparation 2
loading short edge feed (SEF)
paper 6
loading staples, convenience
stapler 15
template management 16
template operations 23
template pools 16
template services 17
interrupt button 24
interrupt button setup 14
ISDN (digital line) 67
loading staples, finisher 12
italic typeface, conventions 4 loading the envelope tray 9
loading the high capacity
J
feeder 10
local name setup 39
localization 14
jams clearance 3
job assembly, copy 48
job completion setup (DC420)
80
job
internet
scanning 17
submission,
services 4
M
job template pool setup 94
K
keypad, fax 15
machine components 2
optional 4
keypad, server fax 54
L
machine information, machine
status 20
labels 28
LAN fax (local area network) 62
LAN fax features 62
language button 24
Laser Safety 14
machine serial number setup
17
machine setups 6
machine specifications 2
left tray specifications 5
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
vii
machine status 19
account information 22
counters 22
options 9
faults 21
machine information 20
paper supply status 20
print reports 21
documen tnamer 16
management
fields 18
reports and counters 21
mailbox add/edit setup 54
mailbox files setup (DC440/
432) 56
mailbox report setup 50
mailbox, fax 30
maintenance 1
maintenance tab, internet
services 13
managing copy jobs 53
managing fax jobs 63
managing print jobs - print 6
Manual Dialing(Fax)
Telephone 13
manual stapling, finisher 12
margin shift setup 31
media
options 13
if file already exists 17
options 8
output format 14
public
and
private
templates 5
options 11
server IP address/server
name 15
sides imaged 10
options 10
options 12
template and template list
4
uses,
special
media print 1
mixed size originals (DC420),
fax 33
network
scanning
authentication login -
guest access and
network authenticated
access 24
modes 16
feature button 17
job status button, job
status button 18
machine status button 19 network
more fax features, server fax
55
scanning
authentication login-
guest access 22
more features, fax 55
network
scanning
authentication login-
network authenticated
N
n up, copy 36
viii
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
access 23
output quality 19
network
scanningoutput selection setup 46
authentication-logging output, copy 10
off 25
P
network scanning setups 94
page margin setup 44
paper attributes setup 46
paper loading preparation 2
network scanning, changing
the
authentication
service 24
notes, conventions 5
O
ordering supplies 2
orientation, conventions 3
orientation, sides imaged, copypaper supply options, copy 19
status 20
56
33
copy 23
scanning 8
56
original size, copy 22
original size, e-mail 8
port setup 96
postscript setups 97
8
power save indicator light 24
original type setup 51
original type, fax 8
original type, server fax 49
other media 13
output defaults setup 29
output format, copy 34
output format, e-mail 13
power save mode 11
power save mode setup 13
power save modes 10
changing the default time
settings 12
low power 11
power save 11
output
format,
network
stand-by 11
scanning 14
powering off 9
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
ix
powering on 7
print 1
fax queue 63
print documents store, fax 29
print from mailbox, fax 31
print queue - print jobs 6
print queue, copy 53
scan, e-mail 19
21
R
print setups 96
receive reductions setup 44
printer setups 97
priority or print queue priority
setup 14
problem solving 1
problem solving tables 4
recycling
the
copy/print
reduce/enlarge options, copy
problem
solving,
internet
services 28
product overview 1
programming a new comment,
copy 40
reduce/enlarge
options,
reduce/enlarge setup 26
properties features, internet
services 9
reduce/enlarge,
network
properties
tab,
internet
scanning 11
regulatory Information 10
services 8
protocol setups 96
the
copy/print
cartridge 5
internet services 15
copy/print
public and private templates,
network scanning 5
public repository 1,2,3,4 setup
reports & setups, embedded
fax 34
95
Q
queue
reports and counters, machine
status 21
completed fax jobs queueresend count setup 62
65 resolution setup 50
completed print job queueresolution, fax 7
56
resolution, server fax 48
retrieving a copy job 52
completed print jobs 9
completed scan jobs 27 ring volume setup 64
completed scan jobs, e-
S
mail 20
safety notes 7
x
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
scan 1
added features 7
scan queue 26
scan to fax, internet services
27
scan to file, internet services 24
scan with local copy, internet
services 27
scanning with internet services
15
secure fax receive setup 65
secure polling, fax 28
2. load the
documents
46
3. dial the number 47
send header requirements 11 server fax setups 67
send priority, fax 23
sending a fax 2
sending a fax using embedded
fax 2
server fax setups, setups 36
address/server
scanning 15
45
serial number 2
server fax
4
authentication mode 58 set user privileges 90
changing thesetup
authentication
long document 42
setup procedures, setups 2
service 60
delayed send 57
keypad 54
lighter/darker 55
logging off 61
access fax communication
setups 58
access rights 86
login-guest access 58
login-guest and network
authenticated
access 60
login-network
access setups 4
account setup 70
account setup (DC420) 77
account summary 74
activity report 47
authenticated
add accounts 78
access 59
add/modify accounts 71
additional setups 15
administrator privileges 90
auditron 67
more fax features 55
original input size 56
original size
auditron
administrator
options 56
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
xi
tools 3
interrupt button 14
auditron enable setups 69
auto answer delay 63
auto clear 12
batch send 62
broadcast
&
(DC420) 80
reports 48
changing the settings 4
communication mode 52
company logo 40
confirmation sheet 95
contention 13
copy setups 25
customer support number
16
date 9
date/time 9
default repository 94
delayed start time 41
delete account 72
dialling digits reporting 43
duplex printing 45
edge erase 33
local ID 38
mailbox files 56
56
embedded fax 37
erase 32
expert image quality 31
failed fax files (DC420) 56
fault override 19
fax communication setups
57
paper attributes 46
paper sizes 17
fax file management 55
fax mailboxes 53
fax panel defaults 50
fax printing options 44
fax report options 47
fax setups 34
paper trays 8
pause time 59
pcl setups 97
port setup 96
postscript setups 97
power save mode 13
printer setups 97
priority or print queue
fax terminal options 38
files for polling 56
xii
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
priority 14
protocol setups 96
receive header print 65
receive reduction 44
redial management 59
reduce/enlarge 26
report languages 15
resend count 62
resolution 50
server fax 67
server fax setups 36
centre tray 5
copier speed
DC420 3
DC432 3
DC440 3
DC420 3
service
access
setup
(DC420) 76
3
envelope tray paper supply
5
set user privileges 90
setup procedures 2
sides imaged 29
system administrator tools
3
time 10
timers 11
touch screen contrast 16
tower mailbox 98
finisher 6
hardware configuration 2
transmission report 49
update all templates 95
walkup screen 11
setups local name 39
sialing characters(Fax) 53
sides imaged options, e-mail
10
tower mailbox 7
speed dial, fax 15
standard features, copy 10
standard features, e-mail 2
standard features, internet
services 2
sides imaged options, network
scanning 10
sides imaged setup 29
sides imaged, copy 14
sides imaged, e-mail 10
standard features, server fax
48
standard features,server fax 44
stand-by mode 11
stapling 12
sides
imaged,
network
scanning 10
sides scanned, fax 9
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
xiii
automatic
finisher 12
convenience stapler 13
stapling
-
template operations, internet
services 23
manual stapling - finishertemplate
internet
12
services 16
start button 24
services 17
store for polling, fax 27
store to mailbox, fax 30
time setup 10
mail 11
stored image setting options,
network scanning 12
stored image settings, e-mail
11
stored image settings, network
scanning 12
stored jobs, copy 50
storing a copy job 50
supplies 2
system controls 24
access button 24
clear all button 24
clear button 24
owner 4
transmission report setup 49
transparency options, copy 36
dial pause button 24
hash button 24
uncollated output, copy 11
user documentation 28
using media print 2
help (?) button 24
interrupt button 24
language button 24
pause (stop) button 24
power save indicator light
24
using the help (?) button 27
W
walkup screen setup 11
warnings, conventions 5
Welcome Center 2
start button 24
T
telephone, fax 13
template and template list,
network scanning 4
welcome centre 2
X
Xerox Welcome Center
telephone number 20
template
management,
xiv
Xerox Document Centre 440/432/430/426/425/420 User Guide
|